JP7390120B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine for playing games.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a jackpot lottery is executed on the condition that a game ball enters a starting prize opening, and a special symbol is variably displayed based on the result of the jackpot lottery. In such a gaming machine, when a jackpot lottery is executed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device, and when the variable time ends, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. Then, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, in recent years, more and more gaming machines are equipped with operating means. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the continuous hit counter value reaches a threshold value, a countdown effect is started even if there is time remaining on the effect end timer.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-180137

As mentioned above, by providing the operating means, various gaming features can be exhibited.
However, in recent years, gaming machines with similar gameplay have been proposed, and innovative gameplay has been desired.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a technology that can provide novel gameplay.

The present invention employs the following solving means to solve the above-mentioned problems. Note that the following solutions and the words in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Moreover, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of each invention specific matter shown in the following solution means. Furthermore, each invention specifying matter shown in the solution below can be made into a lower concept by adding elements that limit the invention specifying matter, or it can be made into a higher concept by deleting the elements that limit the invention specifying matter. .

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution has an operation means that can accept operation input, and uses the operation means to execute a stage performance that progresses the stage of the performance step by step from the first stage to the final stage. If a predetermined condition is not met from the start to the end of the valid time period for validating the operation of the stage performance execution means and the operation means, the stage performance execution means performs the stage performance according to the first progress mode. a progress performance execution means that enables execution of a progress performance that advances the stage of the stage performance and advances the stage of the stage performance in a second progression mode different from the first progression mode if the predetermined condition is satisfied; This is a gaming machine characterized by comprising the following.

The gaming machine of this solution has the following configuration.
(1) An operation means (push button, lever member, cross button, etc.) capable of receiving operation input (operation by the player, single press, repeated press, long press, etc.) is provided.

(2) Using the operation means in (1) above, stage effects (button effect, button press effect, button press effect, button long press effect, button long press effect, lever member operation effects, etc.).

The stage performance may be a performance in which the stage of the performance reaches the final stage, or may be a performance in which the stage of the performance does not reach the final stage. Furthermore, the stage performance may be a performance in which the stages of the performance do not progress one stage at a time (a performance that progresses to an arbitrary stage, such as skipping one stage).

In stage production, if the production stage reaches the final stage, it can be considered a success, and if the production stage does not reach the final stage, it can be considered a failure. A performance that is more advantageous for the player if it is a success compared to a failure (a performance that results in a jackpot, a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of winning, a performance that develops into another performance, a reach performance, a certain promotion performance, a round) continuous performance, etc.).

(3) If the predetermined condition is not met from the start to the end of the valid time period for validating the operation means in (1) above (if the lever member is not operated, MaxIndex and NowIndex If the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is not greater than a certain number), the stage of the stage performance is advanced according to the first progress mode, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied (if the lever member is operated, the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is If the number is greater than a certain number), it is possible to execute a progress performance that advances the stages of the stage performance in a second progress mode different from the first progress mode.

Here, "different" may refer to a mode in which the progress of the stages of the stage performance is different (for example, one progresses one step at a time, but the other does not progress one step at a time), and the stages of the stage performance may be different. may be in a mode in which the progressions are the same but the timings are different (for example, one progresses one step at a time, and the other progresses one step at a time, but the timing of the progress is different).

According to this solution, the progress of the stage performance differs depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is met, so compared to a system in which there is only one type of progress of the stage performance, the progress of the stage performance is different. Variations can be increased, and as a result, novel gameplay can be achieved.

Solution 2: In the gaming machine of the present solving means, in any of the above-mentioned solving means, the operation means includes a first operation means and a second operation means, and the progress effect execution means is provided with the first operation means. A game characterized in that when is operated, the progress performance can be executed, and when the second operating means is operated, a special notification performance that notifies the final result of the stage performance can be executed. It is a machine.

This solution adds the following features.
(1) The operating means includes a first operating means (push button) and a second operating means (lever member).
(2) The progress effect execution means enables the progress effect to be executed when the first operation means is operated.
(3) The progress performance execution means is capable of executing a special notification performance that notifies the final result of the stage performance when the second operation means is operated. When performing the special notification performance, the special notification performance may be performed after the progress performance is performed, or the special notification performance may be performed without performing the progress performance. In the special notification performance, it is possible to notify the result of success or failure.

According to the present solution, the content of the effect differs depending on whether the first operating means or the second operating means is operated, so the same effect is performed no matter which operating means is operated. Compared to other systems or systems in which only one of the operating means can be operated, variations in performance can be increased, and as a result, novel gameplay can be exhibited.

Furthermore, according to the present solution, the final result of the stage performance is announced by operating the second operating means, so the player can quickly confirm the final result.

Solution 3: In the gaming machine of the present solution, in any of the above-mentioned solution means, the first progress mode changes the stage of the stage performance one stage at a time according to the elapse of the valid time. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second progression mode is a mode in which the stages of the stage performance are advanced one stage at a time to the next stage, regardless of the elapse of the valid time. It is.

This solution adds the following features.
(1) The first progress mode is a mode in which the stages of the stage performance are advanced one stage at a time to the next stage according to the elapse of the effective time.

(2) The second progress mode is a mode in which the stages of the stage performance are advanced one stage at a time to the next stage, regardless of the elapse of the effective time.

According to this solution, the stages of a stage performance can be advanced one step at a time according to the elapse of the effective time, and the stage of the stage performance can be advanced one stage regardless of the elapse of the effective time. Therefore, no matter how the effective time elapses, you can reliably advance the stage performance to the next stage one step at a time, and as a result, it is innovative. It is possible to exhibit great gameplay.

According to the present invention, it is possible to exhibit novel gameplay.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the game board unit alone. It is a diagram showing details of the second variable prize winning device 31. It is a diagram showing details of the second variable prize winning device 31. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a starting device 400. FIG. It is a front view showing a part of the game board unit in an enlarged manner. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in a pachinko machine. 12 is a flowchart (1/2) showing an example of a procedure of reset start processing. 12 is a flowchart (2/2) illustrating a procedure example of reset start processing. 3 is a flowchart specifically illustrating an example of a procedure for checking the occurrence of a power outage. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for interrupt management processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing a switch input event. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a performance determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a diagram showing the constituent columns of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a diagram showing the constituent columns of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol selection table which stops at the time of the 2nd special symbol small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol stop display processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of display output management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a structure of variable prize winning device management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big prize opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the release pattern setting table by symbol at the time of a jackpot. It is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening pattern setting process when a small hit occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the release pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening opening/closing operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 2nd big prize opening opening/closing operation process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of a specific area opening/closing operation process. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. It is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the 1st big prize opening opening/closing operation process. It is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big prize opening closing process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of solenoid management processing. 5 is a timing chart showing a movement pattern of a starting device right solenoid 481 and a starting device left solenoid 491. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the drive mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol changes in drive mode. It is a continuous diagram (1/2) showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of special symbols. It is a continuous diagram (2/2) showing an example of a performance image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of special symbols. It is a continuous diagram (1/4) showing an example of performance when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time reduction state corresponds to the winning symbol 2. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of performance when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time reduction state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (2/4). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of performance when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time reduction state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (3/4). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of performance when the result of the normal symbol lottery in a non-time reduction state corresponds to the winning symbol 2 (4/4). It is a continuous diagram (1/2) partially showing an example of a big win performance executed during a jackpot game. It is a continuous diagram (2/2) partially showing an example of a big win performance executed during a jackpot game. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of a drive mode effect (1/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of a drive mode effect (2/3). It is a continuous diagram showing an example of a drive mode effect (3/3). It is a continuous diagram (1/2) showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time saving state. It is a continuous diagram (2/2) showing an example of the effect when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time saving state. It is a diagram (1/4) showing a first performance example of a button repeated performance executed during a ready-to-reach performance. It is a diagram (2/4) showing a first performance example of a button repeated performance executed during a ready-to-reach performance. It is a diagram (3/4) showing a first performance example of a button repeated performance executed during a ready-to-reach performance. It is a diagram (4/4) showing a first performance example of a button repeated performance executed during a ready-to-reach performance. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production example of the button repeated production performed during the reach production. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production example of the button repeated production performed during the reach production. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of working memory performance management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production design variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a production pattern stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process when a variable prize winning device is activated. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of other performance processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a button repetition performance management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a button repetition effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of a button repetition production start. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of button repetition production execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of button press processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of lever input processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process at the time of the end of a button repeated press effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the success scenario and failure scenario of a button repeated press effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an operational image of a success scenario. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an operational image of a failure scenario.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as a game medium, and players borrow game balls from a game hall operator and play games on the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the game on the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium that has a game value, and the benefits (profits) that the player enjoys as a result of the game are, for example, the game balls that the player has won. It can be converted into a gaming value based on the number of balls. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integral door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. When viewed from the front facing the player, the integral door unit 4 is located at the frontmost side. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (inner side) of the integral door unit 4, and an outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure made by combining wood and metal materials into a vertically elongated rectangular shape. It is fixed using In addition, in the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal materials are used for parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integral door unit 4 has a structure in which a saucer unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each operates in an open/close manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left side end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified locking unit 9 is provided inside the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right edges (back sides) of the integral door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side is attached to the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking tool. 7 cannot be opened.

Furthermore, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right side edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when a manager of a game center inserts a special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is activated and the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7 can be opened. . When the whole is opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed at the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integral door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integral door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as balls jammed in the board. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-mentioned inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integral door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7, for example, with the integral door unit 4 opened to the front side. A vertically oblong window 4a is formed in the center of the integral door unit 4, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is installed within this window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integral door unit 4 via a mounting tool (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front side of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface into which game balls can flow.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that projects from the integral door unit 4 toward the front side as a whole, and has an upper tray 6b formed on its upper surface. This upper tray 6b can store game balls lent to players (rental balls) and game balls won by winning (prize balls). Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a position below the upper tray 6b. This lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a model that is connected to a CR unit, and the game balls borrowed by the player are transferred from the payout device unit 172 on the back side to the tray unit 6 (upper tray 6b or lower tray 6b) separately from the prize balls. It is dispensed onto a plate 6c).

A lending operation section 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on this lending operation section 14. When a player operates the ball rental button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number of balls corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) is (For example, 125 game balls) are lent. For this reason, a frequency display section (not shown) is arranged on the top surface of the lending operation section 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium loaded into the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display section. Note that by operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of valuable media with remaining credits. Although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is a model that is connected to a CR unit, it may be a model that is not connected to a CR unit.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removal button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b in the upper position, and a lower plate ball removal lever 6e is installed in the center in front of the lower plate 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d, for example. Furthermore, the player can drop and discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c downward by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e, for example, to the left. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the saucer unit 6. By operating this grip unit 16, the player can operate the firing control board set 174 and fire (drive) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball firing device). The fired game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left side edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged within the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down within the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and windmills. Note that the configuration within the gaming area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to other drawings.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
A left top lens unit 47 and a right top illumination unit 49 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 as components for presentation. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and the left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the right upper illumination unit 49 incorporates the right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the right top illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, a glass frame top lamp 46, left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference numeral). The glass frame decorative lamp 52 includes a button lamp built into the push button 45a.

The above-mentioned various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 perform effects by emitting light (lighting, blinking, change in brightness gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of built-in LEDs, for example. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, glass frame speakers 54 and 55 are installed in the left top lens unit 47 and the right top illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, audio, etc. (general sound) to execute the performance.

[Operation means]
Further, an operating unit 45 is installed in the center of the saucer unit 6 so as to protrude upward from the upper tray 6b on the front side (operating means). In the operation unit 45, a circular push button 45a is arranged in the center thereof, and a rod-shaped lever member 45b is arranged on the left side of the push button 45a. The operation unit 45 can accept operations in various scenes shown on the performance. In one scene of performance, the push button 45a is pressed down by the player, and in another scene, the lever member 45b is pulled forward by the player. By operating the operation unit 45 in various ways, the player can switch the production content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), change the pattern while the symbols are changing, display the confirmation of a jackpot, or change the display when the jackpot is confirmed. It is possible to generate some kind of performance (a preview performance, a definite promotion performance, a promotion performance during a major role, etc.) during the game. The operation unit 45 (push button 45a and lever member 45b) is an operation means that can accept operation inputs from the player. In this embodiment, the push button 45a is the first operating means, and the lever member 45b is the second operating means.

Further, a ring-shaped portion 45c is installed around the push button 45a so as to surround the push button 45a. The ring-shaped portion 45c is a member provided for decoration, unlike the push button 45a and the lever member 45b, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the retracting operation of the lever member 45b. Further, the ring-shaped portion 45c has a plurality of cells separated at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting the player to perform some operation, a reduced version image (button image) showing how to operate the operation unit 45 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to notify the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 45c in the reduced version image is expressed as if each cell were a lamp. Ru. More specifically, in the ring-shaped portion in the reduced image, all cells are lit up when they become operable, and as the remaining time decreases, the cells go out one by one. Then, when the remaining time runs out, all cells are turned off. The actual ring-shaped portion 45c does not have a light source and does not turn on or off like the ring-shaped portion shown in the reduced image displayed on the LCD screen, but the ring-shaped portion 45c in the reduced image By switching the lights on and off in this manner, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining operation time. Note that a light source (LED) may be arranged in the ring-shaped portion 45c.

Further, the push button 45a can protrude upward when a predetermined opportunity occurs during the progress of the game. The push button 45a has a button lamp (light source) inside thereof. The push button 45a normally emits light in a default color (for example, white), but if there is a high expectation of winning, it may emit colored light (blue or red), and when it is pushed out, it may emit more colorful light. can. By protruding the push button 45a, the player can be made aware that the pressing operation of the button at the time of protrusion is particularly important.

In this embodiment, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b are mounted on the same operating unit 45, but the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be provided as independent operating means. Moreover, these operating means may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.
Furthermore, an operating member (third operating means) separate from the push button 45a and the lever member 45b may be arranged. Other operating members include, for example, those that are pushed in toward the back of the gaming machine, and those that are pulled toward the front of the gaming machine.

Further, on the right side of the operation unit 45, a cross key button 44 is installed. The cross key button 44 includes, for example, four push-type buttons. Specifically, the cross key buttons 44 include an upper button placed on the gaming machine side when viewed from the player, a right button placed on the right side, a lower button placed on the player side, and a left button placed on the left side. Consists of buttons. By pressing and operating the cross key button 44, the player can set the gaming environment and input the player's personal data into the gaming machine. Furthermore, the player can switch the auto button function between ON and OFF by pressing and operating the upper button of the cross key button 44.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a channel unit 173, a firing control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , a back cover unit 178, etc. are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that make up the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. Note that the electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 14).

The above-mentioned dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls supplied from a supply route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The channel unit 173 guides the game balls sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to external electronic equipment (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from this external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be Various external information signals representing the progress status, maintenance status, etc. (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation number information, jackpot information, starting opening information, etc.) are output to external electronic equipment. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to a power supply device (for example, AC 24V) installed in, for example, an island facility in a game parlor. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal similarly installed on the island equipment, thereby ensuring the grounding of the pachinko machine 1.

[Board composition]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and with this production unit 40 at the center, the game area 8a is divided into a left side (first area, left-handed area) and a right side ( It is largely divided into the second area, right-handed area) and the lower part. In addition, in the gaming area 8a, around the production unit 40, there is a starting device 400, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, etc. are distributed and installed. Among these, the start device 400 is located at the lower center of the left side portion of the game area 8a. Note that details of the start device 400 will be described later. Further, on the right side of the gaming area 8a, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from above.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the starting device 400, enters the normal winning slots 22, 25 (wins), or , the ball enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the starting device 400 or the normal winning hole 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the starting gate 20, enters the normal winning hole 25, enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that a ball may enter the first variable winning device 30 or a ball may enter the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

In this embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is met (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is met (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is met (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is met (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner) Enables a ball (usually an electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening/closing members 28a, and these opening/closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult for the ball to enter the right starting prize opening 28b (the game ball enters the opening). (There are no gaps that can be created.) On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 operates, the left and right opening/closing members 28a are respectively displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, expanding the opening width to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where it is possible to enter a game ball, and it is possible to generate a ball entering the right start winning opening 28b (variable start winning means). In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 28a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right starting prize opening 28b. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically in a manner that does not extremely impede the flow of game balls toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b when opened). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b) during the opening operation, and the ball entering occurs randomly.

In addition, the variable start winning device 28 is a condition that is difficult to satisfy in a non-time reduction state (predetermined gaming state), and a predetermined condition that is easier to satisfy in a time reduction state (advantageous gaming state) than in a non-time reduction state. If the operating conditions (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner and the normal electric accessory is opened long) are not met, it will be difficult to enter the game ball into the right starting prize opening 28b. On the other hand, if a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the game ball shifts to an easy-to-enter state in which it is easier to enter the game ball into the right starting prize opening 28b than the difficult-to-enter state. The variable start winning device 28 opens a short circuit (opens for 0.1 seconds) when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning mode in a non-time shortening state, and stops displaying a normal symbol in a winning mode in a time shortened state. If this occurs, open the switch for a long time (open for 1.0 seconds to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 is activated when a prescribed condition is met (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot format, or when a game ball passes a specific area during a small win game). , allows the ball to enter the first big prize opening 30b (special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 (attacker) is a device disposed below the variable starting winning device 28, and has one opening/closing member 30a. The opening/closing member 30a reciprocates in the front and back direction relative to the board surface to open and close, for example, by the function of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). As shown in the figure, the opening/closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big prize opening 30b. When the first variable winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a uses its lower edge portion as a hinge and is displaced to fall forward, opening the first big winning opening 30b (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where game balls can flow in, and an event of winning into the first big winning opening 30b can occur. In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the inflow of game balls into the first big prize opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is met (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode) and enables the ball to enter the second big winning hole 31b ( (Special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means). Note that the second variable winning device 31 may be activated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device placed on the right side of the production unit 40, and includes, for example, one opening/closing member 31a. The second variable prize winning device 31 employs a type device in which the opening/closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening/closing member 31a reciprocates back and forth with respect to the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a solenoid (not shown). The opening/closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state where it protrudes from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 31a, so it enters the second grand prize opening 31b. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second grand prize opening 31b is closed). When the second variable winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface and opens the second big winning opening 31b (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where it is not difficult for the game ball to flow in, and it is possible to cause the event of the ball entering the second big winning hole 31b.

[Specific area]
Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a specific area 31x is provided. The specific area 31x is an area where it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is an area where the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area through which the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the second variable prize winning device 31 (opening/closing member 31a) may be provided with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the speed at which the game ball rolls. The game ball rolling speed reduction part is made by making the slope of the opening/closing member 31a gentler or by forming alternately protruding protrusions on the opening/closing member 31a at positions through which the game balls pass in order to make the game balls advance in a zigzag pattern. It can be realized. This allows many game balls to enter the second variable winning device 31 during the small winning game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed inside the start device 400, and game balls that have not entered the various winning holes are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, each starting winning opening of the starting device 400, normal winning openings 22, 25, variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening 30b), second variable winning opening All the game balls hit into the game area 8a, including the game balls that entered the device 31 (second big prize opening 31b, specific area), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island equipment (not shown).

4 and 5 are diagrams showing details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, a second big winning opening 31b is arranged below a sliding opening/closing member 31a. The inside of the second big prize opening 31b slopes downward to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

The passage extending downward splits into two routes at the end. One first passage 31d extends downward toward the specific region 31x, and the other second passage 31e extends downward toward the discharge hole 31y.
A specific area slide member 31c is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. Note that a specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and a discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The specific area slide member 31c is activated when a special condition is met (after the second variable winning device 31 is activated, after the first time has elapsed and before the second time has elapsed), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is activated. Allows the passage of game balls. The specific area slide member 31c slides along the front-back direction of the board surface by the function of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific area solenoid (not shown). For example, after the first time elapses, it is 0.2 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 is activated, and after the second time elapses, it is 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 activates. After the passage of time.

When the specific area solenoid is in the OFF state, the specific area slide member 31c blocks the first passage 31d, making it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x. On the other hand, when the specific area solenoid is turned on, the specific area slide member 31c is pulled into the board surface, making it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 will be explained.
As shown in (A) in FIG. 4, the sliding opening/closing member 31a has been pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball has entered the second grand prize opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second grand prize opening 31b. Here, the first game ball is being detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in (B) in FIG. 4, the first game ball has reached the specific area slide member 31c. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second grand prize opening 31b.

As shown in (C) in FIG. 4, at this point, the specific area slide member 31c has not been pulled inward (because it is inactive), so the first game ball is moved by the specific area slide member 31c. The direction of movement is changed to the right by the member 31c, and it heads toward the second passage 31e. In this case, the first game ball is collected through the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in (D) in FIG. 5, it is assumed that the specific area slide member 31c is pulled into the inside of the board at this point (in operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (E) in FIG. 5, the third game ball also passes through the front side of the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in (F) in FIG. 5, at this point, it is assumed that the operation of the specific area slide member 31c has ended and the specific area slide member 31c has protruded to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the right by the specific area slide member 31c and advances to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected through the discharge hole 31y.

6 to 12 are diagrams showing details of the starting device 400.
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the starting device 400.
As shown in FIG. 6, the starting device 400 includes a base member 410, a cover member 420, a passage port 430, a right movable device 480, a left movable device 490, and the like.

The base member 410 is a member that serves as the foundation of the starting device 400, and is attached to the game board unit 8 with a fastening member such as a screw.
The cover member 420 is a member attached to the front side of the base member 410, and various starting winning openings and out openings are arranged inside the cover member 420.

The passage opening 430 is arranged at the center of the upper part of the cover member 420, and is an entrance through which the game ball enters the starting device 400 (through which the game ball can pass).

The right moving device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the right wing member 438 (see FIG. 7) of the starting device 400.

The left moving device 490 is attached to the rear left side of the base member 410, and is a device for moving the left wing member 442 (see FIG. 7) of the starting device 400.

7 and 8 are diagrams showing the internal structure of the start device 400.
Here, FIG. 7 shows a state in which the blade members (right blade member 438 and left blade member 442) of the starter device 400 are closed, and FIG. 8 shows a state in which the blade members of the starter device 400 are open. Indicates the condition.

As shown in FIG. 7, a guide passage 432 is formed below the passage port 430 and is inclined toward the lower right.
A one-hole croon member 434 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 432. The croon member 434 is a mortar-shaped member having a large opening on the upper side, and an opening through which one game ball can pass is formed in the bottom surface.
A guide passage 436 is formed below the croon member 434 and is inclined toward the lower left.

A right wing member 438 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 436.
A guide passage 440 that is inclined toward the lower left is formed at the lower left of the right blade member 438 .
A left wing member 442 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 440.
A guide passage 444 that is inclined toward the lower left is formed at the lower left of the left blade member 442 .

The starting device right starting winning hole 450, the starting device middle starting winning hole 452, and the starting device left starting winning hole 454 are ball entering holes into which game balls can enter.
The right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 can operate to affect the entry of the ball into the starting device right starting winning hole 450, the starting device middle starting winning hole 452, and the starting device left starting winning hole 454 (openable/closable, movable). Possible) It is a movable body that can be moved.
In addition, the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 are arranged above (upstream) of the starting device right starting winning opening 450 and the starting device middle starting winning opening 452, and the game ball is placed in the starting device right starting winning opening 450 or the starting device. It is a member that influences whether or not it enters the medium start prize opening 452 (whether it passes or not).

When the solenoid that operates the right wing member 438 is ON, the right wing member 438 rises upward and shifts to the open state, leading the game ball to the right starting prize opening 450 of the starting device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the right blade member 438 is OFF, the right blade member 438 does not rise and maintains the closed state, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the right blade member 438 and enters the guide path 440. be guided.

Further, when the solenoid that operates the left wing member 442 is ON, the left wing member 442 rises upward and shifts to the open state, leading the game ball to the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device. On the other hand, when the solenoid that operates the left wing member 442 is OFF, the left wing member 442 does not rise and maintains the closed state, and the game ball passes through the upper part of the left wing member 442 and enters the guide passage 444. be guided.

In the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442, the movable pin inserted near the center of this member is pushed upward, so that the movable pin moves along the guide groove arranged at the rear, and rotates on the left side. It rotates around the axis and transitions to the open state (see Figure 8).

A starting device right starting prize opening 450 is arranged below the right wing member 438. The starting device right starting prize opening 450 is a trigger generation area into which the game ball that has entered the passage opening 430 can enter (pass through) and can generate a lottery trigger (predetermined trigger) for the first special symbol lottery. .

A starting prize opening 452 in the starting device is arranged below the left wing member 442. The starting prize opening 452 in the starting device is a trigger generation area into which the game ball that has entered the passage opening 430 can enter (pass through) and which can generate a lottery trigger (predetermined trigger) for the first special symbol lottery. .

At the lower left of the guide passage 444, a starting device left start prize opening 454 is arranged. The starting device left starting prize opening 454 is an opportunity generation area into which a game ball that enters the passage opening 430 can enter (can pass through) and can generate a lottery opportunity (predetermined opportunity) for the normal symbol lottery.

On the right side of the starting device right starting prize opening 450, a guide passage 462 that is inclined toward the lower right direction is formed.
The outlet 32 is arranged at the lower right of the guide passage 462. On the right side of this outlet 32, a guide passage 460 is formed that is inclined toward the lower left.

On the left side of the starting device right starting prize opening 450, a guide passage 464 that is inclined toward the lower left is formed.
The outlet 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 464.

On the right side of the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device, a guide passage 466 that is inclined toward the lower right direction is formed.
A guide passage 468 inclined toward the lower left is formed on the left side of the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device.
The outlet 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 468.

On the right side of the starting device left starting prize opening 454, a guide passage 470 is formed which is inclined toward the lower right direction.
A guide passage 472 is formed on the left side of the left starting prize opening 454 of the starting device, which is inclined toward the lower left.
The outlet 32 is arranged at the lower left of the guide passage 472. A guide passage 474 is formed on the left side of this outlet 32 and is inclined toward the lower right.

A starting device illumination board 476 is arranged below the starting device right starting winning opening 450, the starting device middle starting winning opening 452, and the starting device left starting winning opening 454.
Three lamps (LEDs) 478 are arranged on the starting device illumination board 476, and when a game ball enters each starting winning hole, the corresponding lamp lights up.

Next, the flow of game balls inside the starting device 400 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 9, the game ball entering the passage port 430 is guided to the right wing member 438 via the croon member 434.
Then, when the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442 are closed, the game ball passes over the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442, and finally ends up in the starting device left starting prize opening 454. Enter the ball.

Since the starting device left starting winning port switch is arranged in the starting device left starting winning port 454, the entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device left starting winning port switch.

On the other hand, even when the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is open, the flow of the game ball is the same up to the middle as when the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is closed.
That is, as shown in FIG. 10, the game ball that has entered the passage port 430 is guided to the right wing member 438 via the croon member 434.

Then, when the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is open, the game ball falls at the position of the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442, and finally reaches the starting device right starting prize opening 450. Or the ball enters the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device.

Since the starting device right starting winning port switch is arranged in the starting device right starting winning port 450, the entry of the game ball is detected by the starting device right starting winning port switch.
In addition, since a starting prize opening switch in the starting device is arranged in the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device, the entry of a game ball is detected by the starting winning opening switch in the starting device.

Here, if the game ball enters the passage hole 430 of the starting device 400, it will definitely enter one of the starting device right starting winning hole 450, the starting device middle starting winning hole 452, and the starting device left starting winning hole 454. In some cases, the ball may enter the out port 32. In addition, not only game balls that have entered the passing port 430 of the starting device 400 but also game balls that have not entered the passing port 430 of the starting device 400 may enter the out port 32 from the side. .
Although the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are described as an example in which they are moved to the open state at the same time, they may not be moved to the open state at the same time.

11 and 12 are side views of the starting device 400.
Here, FIG. 11 shows a state in which the vane member (for example, the right vane member 438 in FIG. 10) is closed, and FIG. 12 shows a state in which the vane member is open.

As described above, the right moving device 480 is attached to the rear right side of the base member 410 and is a device for moving the right wing member 438 of the starting device 400.

The right movable device 480 also includes a starter right solenoid 481, a coil member 482, a flapper member 483, an arm member 484, a hook member 485, a spring member 486, and the like. Note that the hook member 485 may be configured as a part of the arm member 484 (the hook member 485 and the arm member 484 may be the same part).

When the starter right solenoid 481 is energized by the main controller, the coil member 482 is excited and the plate-shaped flapper member 483 is attracted to the coil member 482.
The flapper member 483 and the arm member 484 are connected, and when the flapper member 483 moves upward, the arm member 484 also moves upward. Further, an arc-shaped hook member 485 is connected to the tip of the arm member 484. Therefore, as the flapper member 483 and arm member 484 move, the hook member 485 also moves upward (see FIG. 12).

Then, when the hook member 485 moves upward, the hook member 485 pushes up the movable pin 487 inserted into the right wing member 438, and the right wing member 438 shifts from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 10). In this case, the coil member 482 and the flapper member 483 are prevented from coming into contact with each other by a stopper (not shown) (see FIG. 12).

Further, when the starter right solenoid 481 is not energized, the flapper member 483 is arranged at a position away from the coil member 482 by the spring member 486 (or the weight of the spring member 486 and the flapper member 483). (See Figure 11).
Although the right movable device 480 has been described here, the left movable device 490 also has a similar configuration.

[Features of starting device]
There are many winning device units in the prior art that are provided with an opening/closing member to restrict winnings to a specific winning area. There is no configuration in which the opening/closing member continues to open/close at all times from the time the power is turned on, and the starting winning rate is stabilized by opening/closing the opening/closing member.

The starting device 400 distributes the game balls that have entered the passage hole 430 into the special symbol starting winning hole and the normal symbol starting winning hole (winning hole, actuating hole), thereby "randomly varying various symbols." ” function.

The details of the flow of game balls in the starting device 400 will be described below.
(1) A passing port 430 is provided at the top of the starting device 400, and game balls that enter from there head toward a one-hole croon member 434, and are ejected from the croon member 434 for an irregular period of time. give. Thereby, bumps due to vibrations such as bumps can be avoided. Note that it is also possible to attach a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor, or a radio wave sensor to the start device 400 to strengthen countermeasures against various types of bumps. The croon member 434 is attached to the starting device 400 with some play, and can absorb external impacts (pounding, etc.) with the play, thereby avoiding the influence of vibration.

(2) The game ball discharged from the croon member 434 is guided to a slope-shaped guide path, and is determined by the opening and closing states of the right wing member 438 and the left wing member 442, which are placed in the middle of the guide route and are always opened and closed at a constant rate. The ball path changes as follows.

(a) When the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is open, the game ball falls from the slope and heads toward the starting prize opening of the special symbol set below.
(b) When the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 is closed, the game ball passes over the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442. In addition, the starting device 400 is provided with two feather members, thereby giving two chances to win a prize in the special symbol starting prize opening.

(3) The game ball that is not picked up by the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442 finally heads to the normal symbol starting winning opening (normal symbol operating opening where the normal symbol changes).

Further, the start device 400 has the following features.
Out ports are placed on the left and right of the starting winning hole for special symbols and the starting winning hole for normal symbols, and the out opening at the bottom of the board that is found in general models has been removed.
Since the right blade member 438 and the left blade member 442 are constantly movable, the actuator of the start device 400 is equipped with a flapper type solenoid instead of the commonly used push-pull type solenoid to prevent deterioration due to wear. Preventing.

In addition, since it is necessary for the player to visually follow how the game balls that enter the starting device 400 are distributed, in order to visually notify this in an easy-to-understand manner, a special symbol is placed in the starting prize opening. A lamp (LED) is placed at the bottom of the starting winning opening of the normal symbol, and has the function of lighting up at the winning timing.

By employing the start device 400 having such a configuration, the following effects can be achieved.
(1) By installing the croon member 434, irregularities are given to the timing at which the game ball that enters the starting device 400 heads toward the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442, which is opened and closed, and this makes it easier for the player to The movement of the game ball increases the feeling of elation, and it is possible to shoot the game ball in synchronization with the opening of the right wing member 438 or the left wing member 442, which is a measure against so-called strategy hitting.

(2) By mounting the out port on the start device 400, the area of the out port located at the bottom of the board can be applied to the start device 400, and the start device 400 and the out port can be integrated to achieve compactness. This makes it possible to make effective use of the lower part of the board.

(3) By employing a flapper type solenoid, it is possible to prevent wear of the solenoid itself and ensure durability that allows constant movement.

(4) By arranging a lamp (LED) at the lower part of the starting winning hole for the special symbol and the starting winning hole for the normal symbol and lighting it up at the winning timing, it is possible to effectively notify the player of the winning.

FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position within the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 (normal symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, for example, and a first special symbol display device 34 (a first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38.

Among these, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner by, for example, alternatingly lighting three lamps (LEDs), and then displays the normal symbols in a static manner by lighting or extinguishing the lamps. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the memorized number of 0 to 4 by, for example, a combination of two lamps (LEDs) turning off, turning on, and blinking. For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, and in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking, the number of memories is 1. In a display mode where the number of memories is 2, and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, the number of memories is 3, and in a display mode where both lamps are blinking, the number of memories is 4. For example, display the number of items. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lit lamps.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a indicates that each time a game ball passes through the above-mentioned starting gate 20 or enters the starting device left starting prize opening 454, a passage that triggers an activation lottery occurs. In order to remember this, the display mode changes one by one to the display mode after increasing it (up to a maximum of 4 symbols), and each time the passage of the symbol starts to change, the display mode after decreasing by one symbol. It changes to. In addition, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (memory number is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop display is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passes in which the variation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the fluctuating state and stop state of the special symbol using, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

In addition, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a each have 0 to 4 lights, depending on the display mode consisting of, for example, a combination of two lamps (LEDs) turning off, turning on, and blinking. Displays the number of memories (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the number of memories is 0, and in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of memories is 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinking, the number of memories is 0. In a display mode where the number of memories is 2, and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, the number of memories is 3, and in a display mode where both lamps are blinking, the number of memories is displayed. For example, four items are displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a increases by one each time a game ball enters the starting device right starting winning hole 450 or the starting device middle starting winning hole 452 to remember that a ball entering has occurred. The display mode changes to a later display mode (up to a maximum of 4 symbols), and each time the change of special symbols starts with the entry of the ball, the display mode changes one by one to a display mode after the number of special symbols decreases. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is set one by one each time a game ball enters the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b) in order to remember that the ball has entered the ball. The display mode changes to the display mode after the increase (up to 4 symbols), and each time the change of special symbols starts with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display mode changes one by one to the display mode after the decrease. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (memory number is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where it can start changing (when stopped). , Even if a game ball enters the starting device right starting winning hole 450 or the starting device middle starting winning hole 452, the display mode does not change. In addition, if the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device Even if a game ball enters 28 (right starting prize opening 28b), the display mode does not change. In other words, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes six LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, time saving state display lamp 38e, and firing position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on a single integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8.

[Other configurations of the game board: see Figure 3]
The above-mentioned production unit 40 has an upper edge 40a which functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and also has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 due to their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic movements by, for example, emitting transmitted light from a built-in light emitting device (such as an LED). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed on the inside upper part of the production unit 40, and this liquid crystal display 42 displays production symbols (main symbols) corresponding to the special symbols and a fourth symbol. First, various performance images are displayed. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 on the player based on the configuration of the board surface (the design of the cell board, not shown) and the decorativeness of the performance unit 40.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left side edge of the production unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d passes through the back side of the production unit 40 and is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left within the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down within the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and the game ball can freely roll in the left and right direction here. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower gaming area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k flows into the passage port 430 of the starting device 400 located directly below it. It becomes easier.

In addition, inside the upper center of the presentation unit 40, a movable body 40f for presentation (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) and a driving source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) are attached. The movable body 40f for performance can perform a performance involving the movement of a tangible object in addition to a performance using an image on the liquid crystal display 42 or a performance using a light emitting device. The effect using such a movable body 40f can have a different appeal than the effect using a two-dimensional image.

Furthermore, a 7-segment display device 200 is arranged below the liquid crystal display 42. Three 7-segment LEDs are arranged in the 7-segment display device 200. The 7-segment display device 200 displays the 7-segment performance symbols while the special symbols are changing, or displays the performance during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, a storage display device 300 is arranged at the lower right of the 7-segment display device 200. The storage display device 300 can perform effects related to storage by emitting light (turning on, turning off, etc.) from a built-in LED.

The storage display device 300 is provided with a first special symbol storage and display area M1, a second special symbol storage and display area M2, the storage display area X1, and an effect display area X2.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the first special symbol memory display area M1, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of first special symbols stored (the number displayed on the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a). There is.
Four white LEDs are arranged in the second special symbol storage display area M2, and the number of LEDs lit corresponds to the number of stored second special symbols (the number displayed on the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a). There is.

One full-color LED is arranged in the storage display area X1, and the fact that the LED is lit indicates that the special symbol is changing.
One or more full-color LEDs are arranged in the effect display area X2, and the lighting color of the LED indicates that the expectation level of winning the special symbol lottery increases. Since the performance display area X2 lights up in the same color as the internally selected LED color (reservation color), it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand notification to the player.

When performing the memory color change effect, normally the lighting color of the target LED is changed, but in this embodiment, white is displayed in the first special symbol memory display area M1 and the second special symbol memory display area M2. LEDs are placed. Therefore, the color change effect cannot be performed in the first special symbol storage and display area M1 and the second special symbol storage and display area M2. Therefore, when executing the memorized color change effect, the lighting color of the effect display area X2 is changed in place of the color change effect. However, in this case, it is difficult to know which memory is the target, so it is preferable to display the target LED blinking.
Note that full color LEDs may be arranged in the first special symbol storage and display area M1 and the second special symbol storage and display area M2 to perform a color change effect.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of control operations, and this main control device 70 mainly has the function of controlling the progress of games in the pachinko machine 1. There is. Note that the main control device 70 is built into the main control board unit 170 described above.

The main control device 70 is also equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted, and the main control CPU 72 has a ROM 74, a RAM ( It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76 and the like. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for determining the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the hit determination in the regular symbol lottery. is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input/output (I/O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter/timer circuit (CTC), which are connected to the main control CPU 72 as well as other peripheral ICs. Mounted on the board. Note that a signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. Further, the starting device left starting winning port 454 is provided with a starting device left starting winning port switch 78a for detecting the entry of a game ball.
In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a starting prize opening 452 in the starting device, a starting winning opening 450 on the right side of the starting device, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31, respectively. The device is equipped with a starting winning port switch 80, a starting device right starting winning port switch 81, a right starting winning port switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85.
The starting prize opening switch 80 in the starting device, the right starting prize opening switch 81 in the starting device, and the right starting prize opening switch 82 are respectively the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device, the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device, and the variable starting prize device 28 (right This is for detecting winning of a game ball into the starting winning hole 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting winning of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting winning of game balls into the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) and counting the number.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second big prize opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning hole switch 86 that detects winning of game balls into the normal winning holes 22 and 25. In addition, here, a configuration in which a common winning port switch 86 is used for all the normal winning ports 22 and 25 is taken as an example, but for example, separate winning port switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning port on the left side The switch 86 detects winning of the game ball to the normal winning openings 22, 25 located on the left side of the board, and the winning opening switch 86 on the right side detects winning of the gaming ball to the normal winning opening 25 located on the right side of the board. You can also use it as

In any case, winning detection signals and passing detection signals from these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). In addition, due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the gate switch 78, the starting device left start winning port switch 78a, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning port switch 86 The winning detection signal and the passing detection signal are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, etc. for relaying each winning detection signal. .

The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, second special symbol working memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. In addition, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 while being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. Control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87 described above.

In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first grand prize opening solenoid corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, a second big prize opening solenoid 97 and a specific area solenoid 99 are provided. Furthermore, the game board unit 8 includes a start device right solenoid 481 and a start device right solenoid 481 and a start device corresponding to the start device right start prize opening 450 (right movable device 480) and the start device middle start prize hole 452 (left movable device 490), respectively. A left solenoid 491 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, and 491 operate (energize) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and are variable start winning device 28, first variable winning device 30, and second variable winning device 31, respectively. , opens and closes the specific area 31x, the starting device right starting prize opening 450, and the starting device middle starting winning opening 452. Note that control signals are also transmitted to these solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, 481, and 491 from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

In addition, a glass frame release switch 91 is installed on the integral door unit 4, and a plastic frame release switch 93 is installed on the inner frame assembly 7. When the integral door unit 4 is opened independently, a contact signal from the glass frame release switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. Note that when the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integral door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (special benefit granting means). This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI integrated with a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98. It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and a drive circuit for the payout motor 102 is provided on this payout device board 100. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the specified number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the above-mentioned tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout road ball cut-off switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout count switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 each time. Further, when a ball is out at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout road ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a full tank switch 161 is installed, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (in a position at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged into the upper tray 6b through the above-mentioned channel unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is full of game balls, any more game balls that are paid out are As described above, it flows into the lower tray 6c. Further, when the lower tray 6c becomes full with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends any further prize ball operations and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. Furthermore, the memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so even if a power outage (including momentary power outage) occurs during a game, the information on the number of remaining prize balls that have not been paid out will not be lost. .

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided within the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feeding solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the shooting machine case. Further, the firing solenoid 110 performs an operation of hitting the game balls sent out to the firing position and continuously (intermittently) firing the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the game balls are fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Furthermore, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (firing handle) from a change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in response to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal board 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and signals from the firing lever volume 112, touch sensor 114, and firing stop switch 116 are sent to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal board 118. sent to. Further, a drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feeding solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (an encoded digital signal may be used) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. Note that the drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when a firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 is connected to the firing relay terminal board 118, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, the firing relay terminal board 118 is also connected to the The drive circuit of control board 108 stops driving firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the saucer unit 6 has a built-in frequency display board 122 and a loan/return switch board 123. Among these, the power display board 122 is provided with a display (7 segment LED for 3 digits) of the power display section described above. Further, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively, are mounted on the lending and return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is sent to the lending/returning button 12. and is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball etc. rental device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal, and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, if no valuable medium is loaded into the CR unit, or if the remaining count of the loaded valuable medium is 0, the display circuit of the rate display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium It is also possible to display a display prompting the user to input

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a production control device 124 (computer for production control) as a control configuration. This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The production control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which a production control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The production control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and semiconductor memories such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. Note that the performance control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the above-mentioned back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the production control device 124 is equipped with an input/output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and a sound drive circuit 134. The performance control CPU 126 controls the performance based on commands for performance sent from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the sound drive circuit 134 to cause the various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53 to emit light. It also performs processing to actually output sound effects, voices, etc. from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

The production control device 124 and the above-mentioned main control device 70 are interconnected, for example, via a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the production control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. In addition, a parallel format may be adopted for the communication harness depending on the bus width of various commands sent from the main control device 70 to the production control device 124, or each driver IC (I/O) A serial format may be adopted depending on the hardware configuration.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes, for example, switching elements such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC and a MOSFET (not shown). ) to manage operations such as light emission and blinking. The various lamps include, in addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, and 52, a board lamp 53 for decoration and presentation installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the above production unit, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, etc. Although an example is given here in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136, a saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136. It may also be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a board.

The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and this acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56. to output sound.

In this embodiment, a glass frame illumination board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 are transmitted to the various lamps 46 via the glass frame illumination board 136. ~52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the push button 45a and the lever member 45b described above are connected to the glass frame illumination board 136, and when the player operates the push button 45a or the lever member 45b, the contact signal is transmitted to the glass frame illumination board 136. is inputted to the production control device 124 through. Furthermore, the above-mentioned cross key button 44 is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136, and when the player operates the cross key button 44, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illumination board 136. is input. Here, an example is given in which the push button 45a, the lever member 45b, and the cross key button 44 are connected to the glass frame illumination board 136, but when installing the above saucer illumination board, the push button 45a, the lever member 45b and the cross key button 44 may be connected to the saucer illumination board. In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to this panel illumination board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively. Note that the movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

Further, a button motor 45d is connected to the glass frame illumination board 136.
The button motor 45d is a stepping motor that raises and lowers the push button 45a, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 45. The operation unit control device drives the button motor 45d based on the drive signal transmitted from the production control device 124 to place the push button 45a in either the normal state (initial position) or the protruded state (maximum movable position). It can be displaced in any way.

Further, a 7-segment display device 200 and a storage display device 300 are connected to the production control device 124. The 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 are driven by an unillustrated control device (driver, IC) that controls these devices. The performance control device 124 (performance control CPU 126) controls the 7-segment display device 200 and the storage display device 300 through a control device (not shown).

The liquid crystal display 42 described above is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power that is applied to the backlight (for example, cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Furthermore, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146, which is a general-purpose central processing unit, and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152, which is a display processor, is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). Note that a part of the storage area of the VRAM 156 can be used as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the performance control CPU 126 stores a basic program regarding the control of the performance, and the performance control CPU 126 executes the control of the performance in accordance with this program. The control of the effects includes controlling the effects using the various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, as well as controlling the effects by displaying images using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information regarding the effect (for example, effect number) to the display control CPU 146, and upon receiving this, the display control CPU 146 specifically selects an image for the effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

Display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads the necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Furthermore, the VDP 152 expands the image data into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and individually displays each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. Drive to.

Additionally, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is installed on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. This power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.) from there. The power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, payout control device 92, production control device 124, and inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the firing control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is also supplied to the CR unit via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 120. Note that low voltage power (for example, DC +5V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (such as a three-terminal regulator) built into each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 described above is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output from the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are compiled by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Although a configuration in which the external information signal is routed through the payout control device 92 is exemplified here, a configuration in which the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may also be used.

The above is an example of the configuration regarding control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be explained.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the gaming state (so-called power restoration) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power cut, or conversely clearing the backup information. This is a process for Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts illustrating a procedure example of reset start processing. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be explained step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector type interrupt mode (mode 2) and modifies the default RST type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can thereafter refer to any address (with the least significant bit being 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes reset standby processing here. This process is to ensure a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on), and to check the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, after setting a loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system, for example, when the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted from now on.

Step S105: The main control CPU 72 also initializes a mask register to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value that enables CTC interrupts is stored in a mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the previously saved input signal from the RAM clear switch and confirms whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup was successfully completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 performs a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 performs a sum check on all areas in the work area of the RAM 76 (user work area including a prohibited area and a stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, to "0000H").
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 also clears the command that was waiting to be sent immediately before the previous power-off occurred.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU72 executes production control return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends return commands to the performance control device 124 (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state designation command, performance command when the number of working memories increases, performance command when the number of working memories decreases, number cut (counter command, special gaming state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the production control device 124 changes the production state that was being executed at the time of the previous power cut (for example, internal probability state, display mode of production symbols, production display mode of the number of working memories, sound output content, light emitting state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state recovery processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and sets various values to the gaming state that was being executed at the time of the previous power cut (for example, the display mode of special symbols, internal probability state, (working memory contents, various flag states, random number update state, etc.). The main control CPU 72 also restores the backed up PC register values.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch was operated when the power was turned on (step S106: Yes), the backup validity determination flag was not set (step S107: No), or the backup information was not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 moves to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the RAM 76 other than the prohibited area. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, its contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 also initializes the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU72 executes production control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for production control) to be transmitted to the production control device 124 after initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command to the payout control device 92 to start paying out prize balls.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing and initializes the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and also sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, the next time a CTC interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the backed up program address of the PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 16 (connection symbol A→A).

Steps S118 and S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interrupts and then executes a power-off occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power cutoff (drop in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffers corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90, and then clears the entire work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above-mentioned valid value (for example, "A55AH") in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if power interruption does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. Note that there is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes processing when such a power-off occurs as non-maskable interrupt (NMI) processing.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes initial value update random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to normal symbols are used. is generated programmatically. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 18). (the random number may not be the target) is changed. The random number for updating the initial value is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S120, the random number for updating the initial value is updated. Note that step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 because a similar process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. ). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). (for example, several μs), there is no need to update the initial values of the jackpot determining random number and the winning determining random number.

Steps S121 and S122: The main control CPU 72 allows interrupts and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning type (hit type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 18). Note that the details of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power outage check process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart specifically showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for checking for occurrence of power outage. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and checks whether a main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, a main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162 and determines the voltage level. Outputs a main power failure detection signal when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built into the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not being output at this point in time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits from this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the main power cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in step S130 is subtracted by 1, for example, and it is checked whether the result becomes 0 or not. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point in time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer, in units of bytes, and repeats the addition until the addition is completed for the entire area. .
Step S142: When the sum calculation is completed for all areas (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: The main control CPU 72 then enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for the main power cutoff. After the main power is turned off, backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted in the main controller 70), so the memory contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. It is retained without doing anything. Note that the backup power supply circuit may be built into the power supply control unit 162, for example.

Through the above processing, all of the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be summed) is retained as memory in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off, after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 15).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be explained. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt management processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, several milliseconds) based on an interrupt request signal from the counter/timer circuit. Each step will be explained below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and each pair of general-purpose registers B to L) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. After the values are saved, other values can be written to the registers (A to L) during interrupt management processing.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of a counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and the value is looped within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process here as well. The contents of the processing are the same as those described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input/output (I/O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the starting device left starting winning port switch 78a, the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80, the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, the right starting winning port switch 82, the Reads the input states (ON/OFF) of winning detection signals from the 1 count switch 84, the 2nd count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the starting device left starting winning port switch 78a, the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80, the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, the right starting winning port switch Events that occur during the game are determined based on passage detection signals from the mouth switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. Execute processing. Note that the specific details of the switch input event processing will be described later using another flowchart.

In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start device middle starting winning port switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, the main control CPU 72 controls the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol. It is determined that an event serving as a trigger (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, lottery trigger for the first special symbol lottery) has occurred.
In addition, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 determines the internal lottery trigger (lottery trigger, second lottery trigger, second special symbol) corresponding to the second special symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.
Furthermore, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, or when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the starting device left start winning port switch 78a, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the normal symbol. It is determined that an event that triggers the lottery has occurred.

When determining that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing corresponding to each event. In addition, regarding the process executed when a winning detection signal is input from the starting device middle starting winning port switch 80, the starting device right starting winning port switch 81, or the right starting winning port switch 82, another flowchart will be used. This will be explained later.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for concretely advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the special symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol. 2. It controls the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display results. The details of the special symbol game process will be described later using another flowchart.

In addition, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores the random number (random number determined per normal symbol) acquired upon passage of the starting gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and during this normal symbol game process. The random number value is read from memory and it is determined whether it falls within a predetermined winning range (normal symbol lottery execution means). If the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbol display device 33 causes the normal symbol to be variably displayed and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and then the main control CPU 72 activates the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. It excites and activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is outside the winning range, the main control CPU 72 stops displaying the normal symbols in a winning manner after the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, by sequentially lighting and extinguishing the three LEDs of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and among the three upper and lower LEDs, for example, the upper LED is lit. It is possible to perform a stop display in the case of non-winning with , and to display a stop display in the case of winning with either of the two bottom LEDs lit. Regarding which LED to light among the lower two LEDs, the main control CPU 72 selects the stop symbol (hit symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33 based on the stop symbol number at the time of winning, which is determined by lottery at the time of winning. Determine the display mode.

For example, when the winning probability of the normal symbol is approximately 1/1 in the non-time saving state, the distribution ratio between the two types of winning symbol 1 and winning symbol 2 is "1300:1". In other words, the probability that the normal symbol corresponds to winning symbol 1 as a winning symbol is "1299/1300", and the probability that the normal symbol corresponds to winning symbol 2 as a winning symbol is "1/1300". When the winning symbol 1 is applied, the variable start winning device 28 is short-circuited (opened for 0.1 seconds), so it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable starting winning device 28. On the other hand, if it corresponds to the winning pattern 2, the variable start winning device 28 will open for a long time (open for 6.0 seconds), so there is a chance that the game ball will enter the variable start winning device 28 even in the non-time saving state. occurs.

By setting the distribution rate of winning symbols in this manner, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol fluctuates 1300 times, the variable start winning device 28 will be opened long about once. In addition, in the time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 opens long even if it corresponds to either the winning symbol 1 or the winning symbol 2. In this case, the opening pattern can be made different between the winning symbol 1 and the winning symbol 2. Further, when the main control CPU 72 causes the variable start winning device 28 to be opened long in the non-time reduction state, it transmits a variable start winning device long open start command to the production control device 124.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the winning detection signals input from various switches 78a, 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command. The number of prize balls can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game. For example, the number of prize balls in the starting winning hole corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4, the number of prize balls in the starting winning hole corresponding to the normal symbol is 1, and the number of prize balls in the starting winning hole corresponding to the normal symbol is 1, The number of prize balls for the second grand prize opening is 15, and the number of prize balls for the normal prize opening is 4. Note that information regarding the number of prize balls can also be transmitted to the production control device 124 as a prize ball content command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls acquired]
The number of prize balls in the starting hole of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls in the starting hole of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Further, the number of prize balls may be made different between the starting hole of the first special symbol and the starting hole of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls that come out during the series from the first hit until the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of openings of the grand prize opening, the opening time of the grand prize opening, the maximum number of prizes of the grand prize opening, and the number of prize balls of the grand prize opening are stipulated. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired in one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of game balls acquired.

Step S207a: The main control CPU 72 executes solenoid management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the operations of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491, which are always movable from the time the power is turned on. Details will be described later in FIG. 45.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation number information, jackpot information, starting gate information, etc.) in the port output request buffer.

In addition, in this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 5" are outputted as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means) can provide a variety of jackpot information to players (external information signal output means). In other words, by dividing and outputting jackpot information into multiple jackpots 1 to 5, jackpot types (winning types) can be aggregated and managed from these combinations on a hall computer (not shown), and internally Recognizing changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortening state of symbol fluctuation time, or occurrence of a small hit (a hit where the conditional device does not operate) that is not classified as a "jackpot" even if it is other than non-winning. It becomes possible to aggregate and manage information. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) may count and display the number of jackpots that have occurred within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, or recognize whether or not each machine is currently hitting a jackpot. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently being shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the output status (ON or OFF set) of each of "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 5".

Step S209: The main control CPU 72 also executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). and stores them in the port output request buffer. Using this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested, for example, outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol memory lamp 33a. Controls the lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or normal symbol game process (step S206) is outputted to the port. Note that the drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode that displays changing symbols, displaying stoppages, displaying the number of active memories, displaying the game status, etc.).

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 also executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information process (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 receives drive signals and test signals for the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99, which are stored in the port output request buffer. etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU72 executes production control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command (command necessary for production control) that should be sent to the production control device 124 in the command buffer, and if there is an unsent command, the command to be output is sent. Port output.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the current CTC interrupt.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the processing of steps S205 to S212 (gaming control program module) is executed as a timer interrupt processing, but these processing is incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) specifying the end of the interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After this, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 18). Each step will be explained below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the start device middle starting winning port switch 80 or the starting device right starting winning port switch 81 corresponding to the first special symbol. do. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. If the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the jackpot game (during the small win game). On the other hand, if the winning detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol or the starting device left starting prize opening switch 78a. If the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU72 executes a normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current number of working memory symbols is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if the upper limit number has not been reached, the number of symbols necessary for the normal symbol lottery is Obtain various random numbers (usually random numbers per symbol, etc.). Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol working memories by one. The main control CPU 72 then stores the obtained various random numbers in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 checks whether a passage detection signal has been input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second big prize opening 31b. If the input of this passing detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes a process of turning on the specific area preliminary flag. On the other hand, if the passage detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 18).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process will be explained step by step.

Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains the jackpot determining random number and the jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored in sets (sets). At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol working storage number counter is stored, for example, in the working storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) its value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a will be controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (obtaining the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is obtained by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed twice, one byte each for the upper and lower parts. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves this at the transfer destination address as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). This random number value is also acquired by specifying the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a fluctuation pattern determination random number from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as random values regarding the fluctuation conditions of the first special symbol (fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by specifying the address of the variable random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 obtains the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern determination random number from the specified address, the main control CPU 72 saves these at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means) as a set. The plurality of sections are set in order (for example, first to fourth), and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current special game management status (game status) is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a jackpot (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that no performance based on pre-reading is performed for a ball entering during a jackpot.

Step S37: If the jackpot is not in progress (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the performance determination process at the time of acquisition regarding the first special symbol (prereading process execution means). This process is based on the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, and the special symbol lottery result and fluctuation time are calculated in advance (before the fluctuation starts). This is to determine the contents of the performance (so-called "pre-reading"). In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination performance command (preread information).

Step S38: After executing the performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, "B8H") of the special symbol destination determination performance command regarding the first special symbol (prereading process execution means). This upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special symbol destination determination performance regarding the first special symbol." Note that the lower byte (information regarding validity and information regarding fluctuation time) of the special figure destination determination performance command is set in the previous acquisition performance determination process (step S37), so here, the upper byte is combined with the lower byte. By doing this, a command with a length of, for example, one word is generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of working memories increases regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, a 1-word long value is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value of the upper byte that indicates the type of command (for example, "BBH"). Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the lower byte is set to "0" by default, thereby indicating that the value is "a result (change information) of an increase in the number of working memories." In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", this means that the current number of working memories is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the previous number of working memories "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it means that the previous working memory number was increased by one from "01H" to "03H", and the current working memory number is "02H" to "03H". 04H". Note that the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the production command output setting process regarding the first special symbol. In this process, the special symbol destination determination production command generated in the previous step S38, the performance command when the number of working memory increases generated in step S38a, and the starting opening prize sound control command are transmitted to the production control device 124 ( storage number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 19).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol storage update process will be explained in order.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and confirms whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 19). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 20), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) based on the value of the counter added here. That will happen.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a fluctuation pattern determination random number regarding the fluctuation conditions of the second special symbol from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element means of acquisition). Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means) as a set. The storage method is similar to step S35 (FIG. 20) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current gaming management status (gaming status) is a jackpot. If it is not a jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is because similarly, no effect based on pre-reading is performed for a ball that occurs during a jackpot.

Step S46: If the jackpot is not in progress (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU 72 executes the performance determination process at the time of acquisition regarding the second special symbol (prereading process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the fluctuation starts) based on the jackpot determination random number and jackpot symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the performance content is determined based on the result. It is for judgment. In this process, the result of the preliminary determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination performance command.

Step S47: After executing the performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, "B9H") of the special symbol destination determination performance command (pre-reading process execution means). This upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special symbol destination determination performance related to the second special symbol". Similarly here, the lower byte of the special figure destination judgment effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect judgment process (step S46), so here, for example, by combining the upper byte with the lower byte, the length of 1 word is set. command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a production command when the number of working memories increases regarding the second special symbol. Here, a 1-word long production command is created by adding the increased number of working memories (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte that indicates the type of command. generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current performance command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the production command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, a special symbol destination determination performance command, a performance command when the number of active memories increases, a starting opening prize winning sound control command, etc. regarding the second special symbol are transmitted to the performance control device 124 (memory number notification means). Furthermore, upon completion of the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to switch input event processing (FIG. 19).

[Processing for determining performance upon acquisition]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the performance determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes the performance determination process at the time of acquisition in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 20, step S46 in FIG. means, prefetch processing execution means). As mentioned above, this process includes the first special symbol (when the ball enters the starting winning hole 452 in the starting device or the right starting winning hole 450 of the starting device) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable starting winning device 28). ) is executed for each. Therefore, the following explanation may apply to the process related to the first special symbol, and may apply to the process related to the second special symbol. The details of the process will be explained below along with each step.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination performance command (destination determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (when it fails).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a jackpot determination random number as a random number for first determination. The random numbers loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit) (lottery result destination determination means, preliminary determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random value from this comparison value. Note that the comparison value (lower limit value) is predefined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines, for example, from the value of the flag register whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes off-time variation pattern information preliminary determination processing (variation pattern destination determination means, pre-reading processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command (preread information) regarding the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects the prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 determines that the variation time corresponds to the "missing reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine whether it exists or not. As a result, if the variation time corresponds to "missing reach variation (non-reduced variation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-reduced variation time during time reduction". In addition, in the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and a variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, if the variation time does not correspond to the "missing reach variation (non-reduced variation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction variation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not activated (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 determines whether the variation time corresponds to the "normal reach variation" based on the loaded reach judgment random number. Determine whether or not. As a result, if the variation time corresponds to the "out-of-normal reach variation", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "out-of-normal reach variation time". On the other hand, if the variation time does not correspond to the "out-of-normal reach variation", the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "out-of-normal variation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the production command output setting process (steps S39, S49). In addition, in this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, similar to the process for the above-mentioned miss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the performance determination process at the time of acquisition and returns to the calling source first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, in the judgment at step S54, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of winning values but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes jackpot symbol type determination processing. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 21). Then, similar to step S54, calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result it is determined which winning symbol corresponds. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination performance command. For example, the special symbol destination judgment value is set to ``00H'' if it corresponds to a ``symbol that does not transition to a time reduction state'', and ``01H'' if it corresponds to a ``symbol that transitions to a time reduction state''. . In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 will be rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot fluctuation pattern information preliminary determination process (variation pattern advance determination means, prereading process execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command regarding the fluctuation time at the time of jackpot. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) at the time of a jackpot. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the production command output setting process (steps S39, S49).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 20) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21).

[Special pattern game processing]
Next, details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 18) will be explained. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device management processing. The configuration includes a subroutine (program module) group of (step S5000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be explained along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and also sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000). If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, in this embodiment, a process is selected by specifying a jump destination address in a "jump table", but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag" or a "process selection flag" etc. are used to select a process. There are also known programming examples where the CPU selects the next process to execute. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and in the first step, refers to each flag and performs a conditional branch (continuation/return). However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs work to prepare conditions for starting variable display of the special symbol. Note that the specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is outputted to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and thereby the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot or small win mode (other than non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display process. Note that a jackpot game or a small win game is started depending on the manner in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Jackpot game]
For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a three-round jackpot mode, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of special symbols is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or until counting 10 winnings) for a preset number of consecutive operations (for example, 3 times). Accordingly, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, by intensively winning game balls with the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to win many prize balls at once (special game execution means). The opening and closing operations of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of winning a jackpot are referred to as a "round", and if the number of consecutive operations is three in total, these may be collectively referred to as a "three rounds". In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for the 3rd round jackpot. In addition, as the type of jackpot, not only the 3-round jackpot but also jackpots with other numbers of rounds may be provided.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning hole opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening/closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes for one round. Each time the operation is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0. The main control CPU 72 also generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in production control output processing (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (big win) for that round.

When the jackpot game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the jackpot game (time reduction state) based on the game state flag (time reduction function activation flag) (time reduction state transition means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, and the lottery probability of the normal symbol activation lottery is set from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and variable start winning prize is set. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of openings is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). Note that gaming machines that include elements of so-called 2-type gaming machines (for example, 1-type 2-type mixed machines or 2-type gaming machines), in which a jackpot game is executed by a game ball passing through a specific area during a small winning game. (gaming machine), the winning probability of the normal symbol activation lottery may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the probability of winning the normal symbol activation lottery is set to be a constant probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time saving function is activated, and the opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28 is used to determine the ease of winning. Difficulty can be adjusted.

The gaming states include at least a normal gaming state (first state) and a time reduction state (second state) different from the normal gaming state.
By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can, when the transition condition to the time reduction state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode), It is possible to shift from the normal gaming state (first state) to the time reduction state (second state) (state transition means).

[Small win]
Further, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is performed separately from the jackpot game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small win mode, a small win game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small winning game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner. In the variable winning device management process, the second grand prize opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of times (for example, once or multiple times). It is excited, and as a result, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (operation of special electric accessory). During this time, by intensively winning game balls with the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to win a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

In addition, in the variable winning device management process during a small winning game, the specific area solenoid 99 is energized for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) and for a preset number of operations (for example, once), so that the specific area solenoid 99 The slide member 31c opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. By allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 31x during this time, the player is given an opportunity to start a jackpot game. That is, whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game determines whether or not to start the jackpot game in the variable winning device management process. In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided for small winnings, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, a jackpot game corresponding to the winning type is started.

In addition, even if the small winning game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" will not operate, so the benefit of shifting to the "time reduction state" will not be granted (therefore, (It is not a prerequisite.) In addition, if a small win is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may end after the small win game ends.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, a plurality of winning types are provided: "2 round jackpot", "3 round jackpot 1, 2", "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "10 round jackpot". "2 round jackpot" and "3 round jackpot 1, 2" start when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, whereas "4 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot" and "10 round jackpot" ” is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small win and the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game. Note that the second variable prize winning device 31 operates in the first round among the “fourth round jackpot,” “seventh round jackpot,” and “tenth round jackpot,” and the first variable winning device 30 operates in the remaining rounds.

The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "3rd round jackpot 1" corresponds to the "1st winning symbol" jackpot, "3rd round jackpot 2" corresponds to the "2nd winning symbol" jackpot, and "2nd round jackpot" corresponds to the "3rd winning symbol" jackpot. It corresponds to the jackpot of "design". In addition, the "10th round jackpot" corresponds to the small hit of the "4th winning symbol" (the jackpot when passing through the specific area 31x), and the "7th round jackpot" corresponds to the small winning of the "5th winning symbol" (the jackpot when passing the specific area 31x). The "fourth round jackpot" corresponds to the small hit of the "sixth winning symbol" (the jackpot when the specific area 31x passes). Therefore, hereinafter, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol."

[1st winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "first winning symbol", a jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "first winning symbol" is a jackpot game that can award the player with balls (prize balls) for three rounds. In addition, if a specified number of wins (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first big prize opening 30b will be closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse (the same applies hereinafter). . In this case, by activating the "time saving function" after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to the "time saving state" (number of time saving times = 6 times).

[Second winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a "second winning symbol", a jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the third round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "second winning symbol" is a jackpot game that can award the player with balls (prize balls) for three rounds. In this case, by activating the "time saving function" after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to the "time saving state" (number of time saving times = 100 times).

[3rd winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "third winning symbol", a jackpot game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the second round. Therefore, the jackpot game of the "third winning symbol" is a jackpot game that can award the player with balls (prize balls) for two rounds. In this case, by activating the "time saving function" after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to the "time saving state" (number of time saving times = 100 times).

[4th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "fourth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In this case, starting from the second round, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the 10th round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fourth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to award the player with balls (prize balls) for nine rounds. In this case, by activating the "time saving function" after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to the "time saving state" (number of time saving times = 6 times).

[5th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "fifth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In this case, starting from the second round, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long period of time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the seventh round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "fifth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to award the player with balls (prize balls) for six rounds. In this case, by activating the "time saving function" after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to the "time saving state" (number of time saving times = 6 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "sixth winning symbol", a small winning game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small winning game, The small winning gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In this case, from the second round, the first big prize opening 30b is opened once at a time over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the fourth round. Therefore, in the jackpot game when the "sixth winning symbol" is applied, it is possible to award the player with balls (prize balls) for three rounds. In this case, by activating the "time saving function" after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to the "time saving state" (number of time saving times = 6 times).

In this way, in this embodiment, no matter which winning symbol corresponds to the winning symbol, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to the "time reduction state". It should be noted that only some of the winning symbols among the plurality of winning symbols may be shifted to the "time reduction state".

In addition, if a small hit is won in the internal lottery in this way and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, the jackpot game will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the time will be shortened depending on the type of winning symbol. The gaming machine is called a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type gaming machine.

In this way, when a game ball is fired into the left-handed hitting area (first area) and a jackpot (predetermined first win) is achieved, the main control CPU 72 enables the jackpot game (first game) to be executed ( first game execution means).

In addition, when a game ball is fired into the right-handed area (second area) and a small hit (predetermined second win) occurs, the main control CPU 72 controls the small hit game (second win) that may lead to a jackpot game. game) can be executed (second game execution means).

Furthermore, when a game ball is fired into the left-handed area (first area) and the winning symbol 2 wins (predetermined third prize) in the normal symbol lottery, the main control CPU 72 controls the small winning symbol (predetermined third prize). It is possible to execute an open game (third game) of the variable start winning device 28 that may lead to 2 winnings (third game execution means).

[Special pattern variation pre-processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol variation pre-processing. Each step will be explained below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demonstration production. The demonstration production command is output to the production control device 124 in the production control output process (step S212 in FIG. 18). When the demonstration setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. Note that when returning, it returns to the last address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing (second lottery priority execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc.) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 that corresponds to the second special symbol (so-called priority digestion). At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections (only the first special symbol is applicable), the main control CPU 72 reads out the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then converts the remaining random numbers into 1 Move (shift) to the previous section one by one. The read random numbers are stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. If the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in a temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed with priority over the first special symbol. In addition, without providing such a priority order for each special symbol, control may be adopted in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored (so-called sequential processing). In addition, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM 76 by one; Set the latter value as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation." As a result, the display mode of the number of memories stored by the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol working memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the above display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18). . After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the above special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation preprocessing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 24: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each step will be explained below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 specifies the second special symbol as the special symbol whose storage area is to be shifted. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 specifies the first special symbol as the special symbol whose storage area is to be shifted. do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. In addition, the specific contents of the process are as already described in the previous special symbol variation pre-process.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the object to which the current storage area is to be shifted is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "number of working memories at the start of variation" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. Incidentally, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the working memory counter may be added and then the "number of working memories at the start of variation" may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether the special symbol to which the current storage area is to be shifted is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: If the target is the second special symbol (Step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets a performance command when the number of working memories decreases regarding the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word long command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories increases." In other words, the command when the number of working memories decreases has a value of the lower byte representing the number of working memories after the decrease (for example, "00H" to "03H") for the preceding value of the upper byte representing the command type (for example, "BCH"). "), and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical summed) with an additional value (for example, "10H") that means "reduction in the number of working memories due to consumption". Therefore, for the lower byte, by ORing the added value "10H", the second digit becomes "1", and this value represents "the result (change information) due to a decrease in the number of working memories". Become something. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the previous working memory number "4" (command notation is "14H") has been decreased by one, and the current working memory number is "3" (command notation is "14H"). The notation is "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", this is the result of each of the previous working memory numbers "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") reduced by one. , indicates that the current working memory number is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). Note that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current performance command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a performance command when the number of working memories decreases regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value representing that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol (for example, "BBH").

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes production command output processing. This process is for transmitting to the production control device 124 the effect command when the number of working memories decreases, which was set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (memory number notification means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation preprocessing (FIG. 24).

[See Figure 24: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included within this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). If the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H) and then proceeds to step S2400.

If the above-mentioned jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small winning values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included within this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here refers to anything other than non-winning (losing), but has a different nature from the "big hit". That is, a "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point in the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but a "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. A "small win" is positioned as something that satisfies the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the conditional device is not satisfied). Furthermore, if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during a "small win", it is positioned as a possibility to develop into a "big win" (the condition for operating the conditional device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random value is within the range of the small winning value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small winning flag and then proceeds to step S2400. In this way, in this embodiment, the range of the jackpot value and the small win value is predefined in the program as the winning range other than non-winning. A jackpot determination may be made by writing each of these into the ROM 74, reading them out, and comparing them with random numbers.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to 1/319, and the setting is such that the probability of winning the small jackpot is not set. Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to 1/319, and the probability of winning the small jackpot is set to 1/6. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a jackpot. In order to satisfy these jackpot winning probabilities and small winning winning probabilities, the range of jackpot values and the range of small winning values are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random number values.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a jackpot (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (set 0AH, for example) based on the value of a common win flag, without separately preparing a jackpot flag and a small win flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process on miss. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data when the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 misses. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when losing) to be sent to the production control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the production control device 124 in production control output processing (step S212 in FIG. 18).

In addition, in this embodiment, since a 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of miss is always set to one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) by displaying only the bar "-" lit. In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a fluctuation pattern selection table (fluctuation pattern defining means), not shown, and executes an off-time fluctuation pattern determination process (fluctuation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern number at the time of a miss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol and corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. The fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuations (non-reach fluctuations), reach fluctuations, super reach fluctuations, etc. (the same applies to when there is a big hit or a small hit). In addition, information regarding the variation pattern of the selected special symbol, including information as to whether it is a special variation or not, is sent to the performance control device as a variation pattern command (the same applies to the case of a jackpot or a small hit. ).

Here, since the fluctuating time at the time of a loss differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and indicates that the current state is "time reduction state". Check whether the status is ``. In addition, even if it is not in the "time reduction state", except when performing a variation that executes a reach effect, the variation time at the time of a miss is the "number of operating memories at the start of variation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, for example. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 12.5 seconds) 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, number of working memory at the start of variable display: 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). Note that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of miss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (when the game is off) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time when the game goes off on the stop symbol display timer.

The fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a reach fluctuation pattern, a super reach fluctuation pattern, etc. (the same applies to the time of a jackpot or a small hit). The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of variation, or may have a common table content regardless of the number of working memories at the start of variation, and in the case of winning, a table according to the winning type. It can also be used as content.

Here, the length of the set variation time is greatly different between the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern. In other words, a "non-reach variation pattern" basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 29.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories at the start of variation), whereas a "non-reach variation pattern" "pattern" corresponds to a longer variation time (for example, about 30.0 seconds to 150.0 seconds).

The variation pattern may be a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-continuation) is executed. The pseudo-continuous notice performance is a performance in which the performance symbol changes pseudo-once or multiple times during one special symbol change.

Here, the pseudo 1 variation (pseudo 1: first pseudo variation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the production pattern is executed once, and the pseudo 2 variation (pseudo 2: second pseudo variation) Pseudo variation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the performance symbol is executed twice. In addition, the pseudo 3 variation (pseudo 3: third pseudo variation) is a variation in which pseudo variation of the production pattern is executed three times, and the pseudo 4 variation (pseudo 4: fourth pseudo variation) A variation) is a variation in which a pseudo variation of the performance symbol is executed four times.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is a loss (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be explained.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (the jackpot stop symbol number) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at jackpot]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a jackpot. The breakdown regarding the first special symbol is the "first winning symbol" or the "second winning symbol", and the breakdown regarding the second special symbol is only the "third winning symbol". Note that each of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, if it is a "first winning symbol", the symbols are "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", etc.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have different selection ratios of winning symbols selected at the time of jackpot of the corresponding internal lottery. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the constituent columns of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "99" and "1" is the ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Furthermore, in the second column from the left, "first winning symbols" and "second winning symbols" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. In other words, when the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol is won, the rate at which the "first winning symbol" is selected is 99/100 (=99%), and the rate at which the "second winning symbol" is selected is 100%. 1 (=1%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using jackpot symbol random numbers.

In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. The winning symbols are selectively determined. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is written as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, for example, and the MODE value "B1H" in the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol hit the jackpot. represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" in the lower byte each represent the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol and the "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning will be written as "B1H01H". It turns out.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In this embodiment, if it corresponds to the "first winning symbol", the number of time reductions is 6 (or 10) regardless of whether it is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) granted.

In addition, when it corresponds to the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction. Note that the number of time saving times is not limited to the above value, and may be 1 to 5 times, or may be 7 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "6 times (or 10 times)" means that if the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 6 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 10 times, the time This means that the shortened state ends.

Also, "100 times (or 104 times)" means that if the total number of changes of the second special symbol becomes 100 times, or the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes 104 times, the time will be shortened. It means that the state is ending.

[2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the constituent columns of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol by referring to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. . Similarly, the second column from the left shows the "third winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value. That is, at the time of the jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of "third winning symbol" being selected is 100/100 (=100%).

If the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Determine exactly. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is written as a combination of the above MODE value - EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" in the upper byte is the one selected when the current winning symbol was a jackpot of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte each represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be written as "B2H01H". .

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In this embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applied, the number of time reductions is given 100 times (or 104 times) regardless of whether it is normal or time reduction.

[See Figure 24: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the fluctuation pattern selection table (fluctuation pattern defining means) and executes a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination process (fluctuation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time is determined than in the case of a miss.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes jackpot and other setting processing. In this process, if the type of winning symbol (the jackpot stop symbol number) determined in step S2410 is the "second winning symbol" or "third winning symbol," the main control CPU 72 stores the flag area in the RAM 76. A time reduction function activation flag as a certain gaming state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function activation means). In addition, the main control CPU 72 resets the time reduction function activation flag to OFF (00H) when it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the non-time reduction state, and when it corresponds to the "first winning symbol" in the time reduction state. In this case, the value of the time saving function activation flag is set to ON (01H).

In addition, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of jackpot) as well as the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of jackpot). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process.

Next, the process when a small hit occurs will be explained.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of a small hit (the symbol number that stops at the time of a small hit) based on the jackpot symbol random number. Similarly here, the relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of a small hit is predefined in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the jackpot symbol random number is used to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a separate dedicated random number may be used. Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at small hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the three types is "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", and "6th winning symbol". Note that these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, if it is a "fourth winning symbol", the symbols are "fourth winning symbol A", "fourth winning symbol B", "fourth winning symbol C", etc.

[2nd special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the constituent columns of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "50", "14", "36" has a denominator. This corresponds to the percentage when it is set to 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", and "6th winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. In other words, at the time of small winning corresponding to the second special symbol, the percentage of "4th winning symbol" selected is 50/100 (=50%), and the percentage of "5th winning symbol" being selected. is 14/100 (=14%), and the rate at which the "6th winning symbol" is selected is 36/100 (=36%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number and selectively determines the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small win stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning, as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is written as a combination of the above MODE value - EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" in the upper byte is selected when the current winning symbol is a small hit of the second special symbol. It represents something. Furthermore, the EVENT values "02H", "03H", and "04H" in the lower byte each represent the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the "4th winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of the current small hit, the stop symbol command will be written as "B2H02H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, it generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the production control device 124, for example, in the production control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time savings]
The right column of the second special symbol stop at small hit symbol selection table shows the number of time reductions awarded after the jackpot game is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game and the jackpot game ends. The value of is shown. In this embodiment, if the "4th winning symbol", "5th winning symbol", or "6th winning symbol" is applied, the number of time reductions is 6 (or 10) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction. times) granted.

By using the first special symbol jackpot symbol selection table, the second special symbol jackpot symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 can control the non-time reduction state or If the “1st winning symbol to 6th winning symbol” falls under the time shortening state (the 4th winning symbol to the 6th winning symbol are limited to cases where a jackpot game is executed), the time reduction state will be activated. It can be assumed that the transition conditions are satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Figure 24: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the fluctuation pattern selection table (fluctuation pattern defining means) and executes a small hit fluctuation pattern determination process (fluctuation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, the small win is set only in the second special symbol lottery, and when the small win occurs, a variation pattern having a variation time for the small win is selected. Note that a small win may be set in the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stopped symbols (small winning symbols) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small winning stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the production control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (miss/hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. The main control CPU 72 then generates a fluctuation start command to be sent to the production control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Figure 23: Special symbol fluctuation processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the fluctuation timer value from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then loads the timer value according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbols as described above while referring to the value of the timer counter until the value becomes 0. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 24). In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be sent to the production control device 124. The symbol stop command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. When the stopped symbols are displayed for a predetermined period of time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol stop display processing. Each step will be explained below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. If the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of election]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to non-operation in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big win) is started, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-time saving state).

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, in cases other than the jackpot, the following procedure is executed.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), then it executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 then checks whether the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and the win is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small win flag (01H) is set (Step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the "time-cutting counter", a counter value related to the "time-saving state" is set in the time-saving count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called number-cutting time reduction function is adopted, and when transitioning to the "time reduction state", the first number-cutting counter value regarding the time reduction state is a predetermined value (for example, 6 times or 100 times). , and the second count counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10 times or 104 times). Note that the information on the first number-cutting counter value and the second number-cutting counter value is notified (transmitted) to the production control device 124 by the number-cutting counter command.
Note that the number cutting counter value related to the time reduction state is such that the time reduction state is controlled using only one counter value, without providing two counter values such as a first number cutting counter value and a second number cutting counter value. Good too.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded counter value (first count counter value or second count count value) is 0. At this time, if the number-cutting counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the number-of-times counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts by 1) the first number cutting counter value and the second number cutting counter value. Specifically, when the second special symbol is being stopped and displayed, both the first number cutting counter value and the second number cutting counter value are decremented, and when the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed, decrements only the second rounding counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the result of subtracting any of the number-cutting counter values (the first number-cutting counter value or the second number-cutting counter value) is zero. As a result of the subtraction, if any of the number-cutting counter values is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if any one of the count counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the count cut function is activated. In this embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 6 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol misses six times in the time shortening state (including the small hit fluctuation if the specific area is not passed), the time shortening function activation flag is reset. be done. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol misses six times in the time shortening state, the time shortening function activation flag is not reset, and after that, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed four times in the time shortening state. When the deviation variation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The time reduction function activation flag is explained using an example in which it is reset when the stop display time of the special symbol has passed, but even if it is reset at the end of the special symbol fluctuation time (before the stop display time measurement starts). good.
When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

In this way, the end condition of the time reduction state (predetermined end condition) is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after transitioning to the time reduction state reaches the first number (for example, 6 times), or When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after transitioning to the time reduction state, reaches a second number of times (for example, 10 times) that is larger than the first number of times. This is a condition that must be met.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 18) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting processing (step S1200), normal symbol display setting processing (step S1210), status display setting processing (step S1220), working memory display setting processing (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are performed on the first special symbol display device 34, the second special Generate and output drive signals to be applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. It is processing.

The status display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting drive signals to be applied to each LED of the gaming status display device 38. First, in the status display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the time saving status display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function activation flag. For example, if the time saving function activation flag is set to a value (01H) when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 will turn on the time saving status display lamp 38e regardless of whether the power is turned on or not. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are activated due to a jackpot game or a small winning game, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f. Output. Furthermore, if the value (01H) is set in the time saving function activation flag, the main control CPU 72 sends a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation indicator lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time saving status display lamp 38e. Output. In addition, when the firing position designation display lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and turns off when the "time reduction state" ends. (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 also controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is a combination of display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 lights up the lamps (for example, all of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "10 rounds". generates a lighting signal for the lamp). Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "2 rounds", the main control CPU 72 generates a lighting signal for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "2 rounds". . Since the three display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the five types of jackpots of this embodiment. Note that the details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly communicate them to the player.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be explained. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of variable winning device management processing. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a grand prize opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a grand prize opening opening/closing operation process (step S5300), a grand prize opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and also sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process (step S5200). On the other hand, if the big winning hole opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning hole opening/closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big winning hole opening/closing operation process is completed. If so, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Furthermore, when the grand prize opening/closing operation process and the grand prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Each process will be explained in more detail below.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 and the time of each opening at the time of a jackpot or a small hit, respectively. Each step will be explained below.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, if the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5203. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, if the value of the small win flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of jackpot is set based on the jackpot symbol-specific opening pattern setting table. Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a large winning opening opening pattern setting process for small winning. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning hole is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening/closing operation process, and returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process when hitting the jackpot]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a big prize opening at the time of a big hit. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous operating device, and the "accessory continuous operating device" refers to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 30. This is a device that can operate the variable winning device 31 continuously. In addition, the "condition device" and the "accessory continuous operation device" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, this means that the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the jackpot game unless this conditional device is activated. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "big winning combination start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, if the winning symbol corresponds to the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. The main control CPU 72 also generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot opening pattern selection process by symbol. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each jackpot symbol and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, settings such as the number of rounds to be executed, opening time, and interval time. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5216.

[Opening pattern setting table by symbol at jackpot]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of jackpot. This opening pattern setting table for each jackpot symbol defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be activated in each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. It is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the grand prize opening are determined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the first winning symbol, the variable winning device that is activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 3, and 3 of these rounds are rounds in which a ball is played. The opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball in play is 29.0 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the third round. It operates and the first big prize opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the upper limit number of balls is confirmed. The same applies hereinafter). Therefore, if the first winning symbol falls, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially three rounds.

[Second winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the second winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 3, and 3 of these rounds are rounds in which a ball is played. The opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball in play is 29.0 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the third round. It operates and the first big prize opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the second winning symbol falls, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially three rounds.

[3rd winning symbol]
When it corresponds to the third winning symbol, the variable winning device to be activated is the first variable winning device 30. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is two, and two of the rounds are rounds in which a ball is played. The opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball in play is 29.0 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round from the first round to the second round. It operates and the first big prize opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the third winning symbol falls, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially two rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the jackpot symbol-specific opening pattern setting table and sets the jackpot opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol.

[See Figure 33: Big prize opening pattern setting process when hitting a jackpot]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of variable winning device to be operated in each round (from the first round to the final round) during the jackpot game to the first variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all winning symbols at the time of jackpot (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) is that the first big winning hole 30b is opened from the first round to the final round, The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, the number of rounds to be executed for the opening pattern corresponding to the 3-land jackpot (first winning symbol and second winning symbol) is set to 3 rounds. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for opening the jackpot for each round at the time of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of jackpot. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball being thrown. Therefore, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the first prize opening 30b during one opening (for example, firing The control board set 174 shoots 10 or more game balls (preferably 6 seconds or more). In addition, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time becomes a time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a jackpot. In this embodiment, 1.0 seconds is set as the interval timer of the opening pattern corresponding to all winning symbols (first to third winning symbols) at the time of jackpot. For example, after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the opening is temporarily closed, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol, the number of rounds to be executed is "3 rounds", so the continuous operation number command is generated as a command including a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Small winning big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small winning start (small winning game in progress)" as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small winning game is in progress. A status command indicating that a small winning game is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit release pattern setting table and selects the release pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, settings such as the number of openings, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5256.

[Small hit release pattern setting table]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a small hit release pattern setting table. This small winning opening pattern setting table defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In addition, in this embodiment, the number of opening patterns set at the time of a small hit is one, but a plurality of opening patterns may be defined for each winning symbol.

In the case of a small hit, the variable winning device that is activated is the second variable winning device 31. Further, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two times, and the time period for each opening is 0.9 seconds. Note that the interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 seconds.

The opening start time of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned on and the specific area slide member 31c is operated) is 0.2 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening.
Further, the end time of opening of the specific area 31x (the timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned OFF and the specific area slide member 31c is deactivated) is 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening. .

[See Figure 35: Setting process for opening the big prize opening when a small hit occurs]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of variable winning device to be operated during the small winning game to the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of openings to be executed during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, two times is set as the number of openings of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. Main control CPU 72 next executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the big winning hole based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the waiting time (interval timer) between openings of the big winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. Note that in this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 seconds). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small winning game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small winning. In this embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 starts opening. be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big winning opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Big prize opening opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. The following is a step-by-step explanation.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the current internal state is "in a big role". Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and determines whether the current internal state is "during a big win (during jackpot game)" depending on whether or not the internal state flag for control is set. Check to see if it is currently in a major role. In addition, the flag "during a big win (during a jackpot game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous process (during the jackpot opening pattern setting process: step S5212) or during the process when passing through a specific area, which will be described later. . As a result of this confirmation, if the current internal state is "in a big role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5306. On the other hand, if the current internal state is not "big win" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU72 executes the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 to open and close the second big winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applying voltage to the second big winning opening solenoid 97 output the drive signal). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU72 executes the first big prize opening opening/closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 to open and close the first big winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applying voltage to the first big winning opening solenoid 90) output the drive signal). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

[Second grand prize opening opening/closing operation process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5310: The main control CPU72 opens the second big prize opening 31b. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 is activated and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5312.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes release timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous process (step S5260 and step S5264 of the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). In addition, in this process, in addition to the release timer related to the opening of the second big winning a prize opening 31b, a countdown is performed regarding the release timer (opening start time, opening end time) related to the opening of the specific area 31x. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes specific area opening/closing operation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the specific area slide member 31c to open and close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the second big prize opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the open timer for the second big winning hole 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the second big prize opening 31b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. On the other hand, if the opening time of the second big prize opening 31b has not ended (No), the main control CPU72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls won in the second variable prize winning device 31 (opened big prize opening) during the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal inputted from the second count switch 85 during the open time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the current count is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number determines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) that is allowed per opening at the time of small winning as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening/closing operation process, so the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5310 to S5320 described above.

If it is determined in the above step S5316 that the open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5320 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322. In addition, since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the open time has ended before checking.

Step S5322: The main control CPU72 closes the second big prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal that was being applied to the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and checks whether the specific area passing flag is ON based on whether the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, if the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second big prize opening 31b is open during the small winning game, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, if the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second big prize opening 31b is open during the small winning game, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. Note that the specific area passing flag may be set to ON during the previous specific area opening/closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes a process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passed through the specific area 31x while the second big prize opening 31b was open during the small winning game. , executes a process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, a process of starting a jackpot game (special game via special game execution means, special game execution means). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly illustrated here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable winning device management that is the caller from step S5327a for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the big prize opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is executed directly instead of from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU72 increments the value of the second big prize opening number counter. In addition, the value of the second big prize opening number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the second big prize opening number counter after incrementing has reached the set number of times within the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win", for example. It is. In addition, especially if such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so the counter value will change with one opening/closing operation. Since the set number of times has been reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, if the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small win" is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening/closing operation process, the steps from step S5310 to step S5327b described above are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening number counter is incremented in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning hole closing process, and returns to the big winning hole opening/closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening/closing operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of specific area opening/closing operation processing. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release timer regarding the release start time regarding the release of the specific area 31x that was counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0. Check whether the opening time of 31x has started. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not started (No) or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the specific area slide member 31c operates, and the specific area 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and checks whether the specific area reserve flag is turned on. As a result of this confirmation, if it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area preliminary flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338. Note that the specific area passage flag and specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the jackpot game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening time of the specific area 31x by checking whether the value of the opening timer regarding the opening of the specific area 31x that has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312) is 0. Check whether it has finished. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5340. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the specific area slide member 31c returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU72 ends the small winning game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 deletes "small winning game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small winning game in the control process (small winning end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be operated continuously, and the jackpot game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "big winning combination start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of winning symbol. For example, when the first winning symbol or the second winning symbol matches, a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. The main control CPU 72 also generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes a pattern-specific opening pattern selection process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects the opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when the small hit occurs. Main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 operates a variable winning device that is operated every round (from the second round to the final round) during the jackpot game based on the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbol regarding the special symbol when a small win occurs. The type is set in the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small win occurs. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of rounds to be executed for the opening pattern corresponding to the fourth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for opening the jackpot for each round at the time of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when it corresponds to a small hit. For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball being thrown. Therefore, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is sufficient time for the ball to easily enter the first prize opening 30b during one opening (for example, firing The control board set 174 shoots 10 or more game balls (preferably 6 seconds or more). In addition, if the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time becomes a time during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the first big winning hole 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a waiting time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a jackpot. In this embodiment, 1.0 seconds is set as the interval timer of the release pattern corresponding to the winning symbols (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when a small hit occurs. For example, after the opening of the first big prize opening 30b between the second and third rounds is completed and the opening is temporarily closed, an interval timer of about 1.0 seconds is set. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fourth winning symbol, the number of rounds to be executed is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation number command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process described above. Main control CPU 72 next executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, if the winning symbols related to the special symbols that correspond to the small hit are "4th winning symbol" to "6th winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function activation flag to ON (time means for transitioning to a shortened state, means for activating a time shortening function). In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the "4th winning symbol" to "6th winning symbol", the time reduction state is always entered. Only the winning symbols may be shifted to the time shortening state.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second big prize opening opening/closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. This opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area defines the opening/closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to a special symbol when a small hit occurs. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the grand prize opening are determined for each winning symbol.

[4th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fourth winning symbol, the first variable winning device 30 is activated. Further, the number of execution rounds is 10 rounds. Note that this number of rounds to be executed includes the operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 that was opened by a small hit, so in the jackpot game that will start from now on, 9 rounds will be obtained by subtracting 1 round from 10 rounds. This is the actual number of rounds in a jackpot game (hereinafter, the same applies to the 5th winning symbol and the 6th winning symbol). Furthermore, nine of the nine rounds are rounds in which the ball is released. The opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball in play is 29.0 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol when it corresponds to a small hit is the fourth winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 due to the small winning is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round, and the first big prize opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x in accordance with the fourth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially nine rounds.

[5th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the fifth winning symbol, the first variable winning device 30 is activated. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 7 rounds (the actual number of rounds in a jackpot game is 6 rounds), and 6 of these rounds are rounds with balls being thrown. The opening time for opening the first big prize opening 30b per round in a round with a ball in play is 29.0 seconds. Further, the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol when a small hit is applied is the fifth winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 due to the small winning is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the seventh round, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates for 29.0 seconds during each round, and the first big prize opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x in accordance with the fifth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially six rounds.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball passes through the specific area 31x corresponding to the sixth winning symbol, the first variable winning device 30 is activated. Further, the number of rounds to be executed is 4 rounds (the actual number of rounds in a jackpot game is 3 rounds), and 3 of these rounds are rounds with a ball being thrown. The opening time for opening the first big winning hole 30b per round in a round with a ball in play is 29.0 seconds, and the interval time provided between each round is 1.0 seconds.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small winning occurs is the 6th winning symbol, when the jackpot game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is set to 29.0 from the second round to the fourth round. It operates for 0 seconds during each round to open the first big prize opening 30b. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x in accordance with the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially three rounds.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 refers to the symbol-specific opening pattern setting table when passing through the specific area and sets the opening pattern of the big winning hole corresponding to the type of winning symbol regarding the special symbol when a small hit occurs. I will do it.

[First grand prize opening opening/closing operation process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first big prize opening opening/closing operation process. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S5380: The main control CPU72 opens the first big prize opening 30b. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5382.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes release timer countdown processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets in the previous process (step S5220 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in Figure 33) or step S5364 in the process when passing through a specific area (in Figure 40)). Executes the release timer countdown. The main control CPU 72 next executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the opening time of the first big prize opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the open timer for the first big winning hole 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, if the opening time of the first big prize opening 30b has ended (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. On the other hand, if the opening time of the first big prize opening 30b has not ended (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won in the first variable prize winning device 30 (opened big prize opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 during the open time. Main control CPU 72 next executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of prize balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during jackpot) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening/closing operation process, so the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5380 to S5390 described above.

If it is determined in the above step S5386 that the open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5390 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5392. Note that if the value of the open timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5390 before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number. In most cases, it is determined in S5386 that the open time has ended.

Step S5392: The main control CPU72 closes the first big prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal that was being applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets in the previous process (step S5222 of the jackpot opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5366 in the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Execute interval timer countdown. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 next advances to step S5395. Although not particularly illustrated here, until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable winning device management which is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt. Return to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the big prize opening opening/closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is executed directly instead of from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the open count counter after incrementing has reached the set count within the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set within the current round" is determined is to correspond to an opening pattern such as "opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round during a jackpot". It is. Note that this embodiment does not particularly adopt such an opening pattern, so the "number of times set within the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening/closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5398.

Note that if a pattern is adopted in which the opening and closing operations are repeated multiple times within one round as described above, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is currently set to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, so the steps from step S5380 to step S5390 described above are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening number counter is incremented in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning hole closing process, and returns to the big winning hole opening/closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process.

[Big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process. This big winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. The following is a step-by-step explanation.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current game is in a big win (jackpot game), and if it is in a big win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter described above. As a result, for example, when the first round ends and the second round begins, the value of the round number counter becomes "1". In addition, if the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the jackpot game is started after the small win ends, the opening of the second big prize opening 31b at the time of the small win is treated as the first round, and the jackpot is played. The first round in which the game starts is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the round number counter after incrementing has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set execution round number (14 or 15 after subtracting 1), ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is sent to the production control device 124 in the production control output process as described above. The production control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize opening opening/closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process which is the next jump destination. After executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process again, and repeats steps S5402 to S5408. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

If the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (=0) and sets the next jump destination to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process will be selected.

[When small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the following procedure is followed (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not in the big prize (step S5401: No), it increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the incremented opening number counter has reached the set number of openings. The number of openings is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 35). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set number of openings (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize opening opening/closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31), the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening opening/closing operation process which is the next jump destination. Then, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big winning opening closing process again, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening/closing operation of the second variable prize winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of openings reaches the set number of openings.

When the actual number of openings at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of openings (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the open count counter (=0) and sets the next jump destination to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, the next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the end process will be selected.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for termination processing. This termination process is for arranging conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the jackpot flag value (01H) is set, and if the jackpot flag value is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot gaming state ends under the control process of the main control CPU 72. Moreover, the main control CPU 72 erases "during jackpot" from the internal state flag, and ends the jackpot game in the control process (end of jackpot). Note that the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the time saving function activation flag is 01H (set). This flag is used in the jackpot and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 24) during the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing, and the time reduction function setting processing for each symbol when passing through a specific area during the processing when passing through a specific area (see Fig. 24). This is set in step S5370) in 40.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time saving function activation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time saving times (for example, 6 times (or 10 times), 100 times (or 104 times)). do. The value of the set time saving number is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of time reductions set here becomes the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of special symbols in subsequent games. In this embodiment, in order to manage the number of time reductions, number cut counter values (a first time cut counter value and a second time cut counter value) regarding two types of time reduction states are prepared. Here, the first number-cutting counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol changes once, and is set to "6" or "100" as an initial value. In addition, the second number-cutting counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes once, and is set to "10" or "104" as an initial value. Note that if the value of the time saving function activation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 determines that if the conditions for transition to the time reduction state are met (if the predetermined transition conditions are met, or if a winning symbol is won that causes the transition to the time reduction state) ), after the end of the jackpot game, conditions that are more advantageous compared to the non-time reduction state are applied from the non-time reduction state (predetermined gaming state) (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery is shortened, and the variable start winning device is It is possible to shift to a shortened time state (advantageous gaming state) in which the open time is extended (advantageous gaming state transition means).

The procedure up to this point is for the case of a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small win, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small win flag (00H) and also erases "Small win game in progress" from the internal state flag. Note that in the case of a small win, the internal conditional device does not operate, so this procedure is simply for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a status designation command based on the flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the jackpot ends, a state designation command representing "normal" as the gaming state is generated. Further, if the time reduction function activation flag is set, a state designation command representing "time reduction in progress" as an internal state is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the production control device 124 in production control output processing.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 23) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Solenoid management processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for solenoid management processing. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure. This process is a detailed explanation of step S207a in FIG.

Step S2800: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the power-on operation has been completed. If the pachinko machine 1 has just been powered on and the operation of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 at power-on has not been completed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2810.

Step S2810: The main control CPU 72 executes a power-on operation process. In this process, the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491 are operated in a predetermined movable pattern (operation pattern). Thereby, the left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 of the start device 400 operate based on a fixed movable pattern from when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on until when the power is turned off. When the power-on operation is completed, it is determined in the previous step S2800 that the operation is completed (Yes), and therefore step S2810 is skipped thereafter.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing a movement pattern of the start device right solenoid 481 and the start device left solenoid 491.

[Time t0]
The starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t1]
Start device right solenoid 481 is activated.
The starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t2]
The starting device right solenoid 481 completes its operation and becomes inactive.
The starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

[Time t3]
The starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
Start device left solenoid 491 is activated.

[Time t4]
The starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The starter left solenoid 491 ends its operation and becomes inactive.

[Time t5]
The starter right solenoid 481 is inactive.
The starter left solenoid 491 is inactive.

The time T1 from time t0 to time t1 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T2 from time t1 to time t2 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T3 from time t2 to time t3 is, for example, 50 ms.
The time T4 from time t3 to time t4 is, for example, 100 ms.
The time T5 from time t4 to time t5 is, for example, 500 ms.

The time TA from time t0 to time t5 is one cycle (for example, 800 ms), and this one-cycle movable pattern is repeatedly executed from the time the power is turned on until the time the power is turned off. Note that a plurality of types of movable patterns for one cycle may be prepared, and the plurality of types of movable patterns may be repeatedly executed.

By applying such a movable pattern, the game ball that enters the starting device 400 is made to enter the starting winning hole of the first special symbol (starting winning hole 452 in the starting device or right starting winning hole 450 of the starting device). At the same time, it is possible to allow more game balls to enter the normal symbol starting winning hole (starting device left starting winning hole 454).

Specifically, assuming that 12 game balls enter the passing port 430 of the starting device 400 in one minute, on average, two of them enter the starting device right starting prize port 450. Two more game balls enter the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device, and the remaining eight game balls enter the starting prize opening 454 on the left side of the starting device.

Furthermore, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 operates the left wing member 442 (movable body) and the right wing member 438 (movable body) in a predetermined movable pattern in the normal gaming state (first state). The left blade member 442 and the right blade member 438 can be operated in a predetermined movable pattern even in the time shortened state (second state) (control means).

[Game flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the normal mode.
When starting a game with the pachinko machine 1, the game starts from [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time saving state".

[F1] During the game in the normal mode, when a game ball enters the starting prize opening 452 in the starting device or the starting winning opening 450 on the right side of the starting device (in a state where the memory of the second special symbol does not exist, the first If the memory of the special symbol exists), [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F1] normal mode.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F5] the first winning symbol corresponds to the first winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the game shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is "time reduction state".

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F7] the second winning symbol is applied, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the game shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the normal mode (non-time saving state), no matter what winning symbol it is, after the jackpot game ends, you will not be able to drive. mode.

[Game flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the normal mode.
[F1] During the game in the normal mode, when the game ball enters the right starting winning hole 28b (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F1] normal mode.

[F14] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] the third winning symbol corresponds, [F6] the jackpot game is executed, and the game shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F17] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and a shift is made to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F19] corresponds to the 5th winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and a shift is made to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F20] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and a shift is made to [F8] drive mode.

[Game flow (Part 3)]
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the drive mode.
[F8] During the game in the drive mode, when the game ball enters the starting device left starting winning hole 454 of the starting device 400 or the starting device middle starting winning hole 452 of the starting device 400 (memory of the second special symbol exists) (If the memory of the first special symbol exists in a state where it is not done), [F2] the first special symbol changes. Note that the drive mode may be a non-time saving state.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F8] drive mode state. However, in the case of the final time saving variation where the time saving state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode upon completion of this deviation variation.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F5] the first winning symbol corresponds to the first winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the game shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F4] When the first special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F7] the second winning symbol is applied, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the game shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you hit the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery while staying in the drive mode (time reduction state), no matter what winning symbol it is, after the jackpot game ends, you will be in the drive mode. to move to.

[Game flow (Part 4)]
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode.
[F8] During the game in the drive mode, when the game ball enters the right starting winning hole 28b (if the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol changes.

[F13] If the second special symbol lottery results in a "miss", the game will start over from the [F8] drive mode state. However, in the case of the final time saving variation where the time saving state ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode upon completion of this deviation variation.

[F14] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "jackpot (winning probability 1/319)" and [F15] the third winning symbol corresponds, [F6] the jackpot game is executed, and the game shifts to the [F8] drive mode.

[F16] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F17] corresponds to the fourth winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and a shift is made to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F19] corresponds to the 5th winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and a shift is made to [F8] drive mode.

[F16] When the second special symbol lottery results in a "small win (winning probability 1/6)", [F20] corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game, [F6] A jackpot game is executed, and a shift is made to [F8] drive mode.

In this way, if you win in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of whether you stay in normal mode (non-time reduction state) or drive mode (time reduction state), after the jackpot game ends, , shift to drive mode.

[Example of produced image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the display mode of the 7-segment display device 200 will be described using several examples. As described above, when an internal lottery for a jackpot is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display using the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (design display means). However, as mentioned above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lit and flashed by 7-segment LEDs, so they lack visual appeal. Similarly, the manner in which the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 stops displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a symbolic design using a 7-segment LED, etc. ” lacks visual impact. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200.

In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 42 displays the performance symbol Hz (main symbol), the fourth symbol Z1, Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the preview performance, etc., and the 7-segment display device 200 A 7-segment effect pattern is displayed on the screen.

The effect pattern Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, three effects: a left effect pattern, a middle effect pattern, and a right effect pattern. displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each production pattern. Here, the left performance symbols, middle performance symbols, and right performance symbols all constitute a symbol array (performance symbol array) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order from "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

The 7-segment performance patterns displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 include, for example, the 7-segment design on the left, the 7-segment design in the center, and the 7-segment design on the right. They are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the device 200. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each production pattern. Here, each of the 7-segment performance symbols constitutes a symbol array (performance symbol array) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order from "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

FIGS. 51 and 52 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and static display of special symbols. Here, an example of a variable display performance and a stop display performance performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the 7-segment display device 200 is shown regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (loss). This fluctuating display performance corresponds to a series of performances performed from when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) starts to fluctuately display until it is stopped and displayed (including a fixed stop). Further, the stop display performance is a performance that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and that the result of the internal lottery at that time is displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and stop display effect for each variation employed in this embodiment will be explained.

[Before fluctuation display]
(A) in FIG. 51: For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (not in the demonstration performance), three rows of performance symbols Hz are displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the performance symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed.

Further, in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 42, a fourth symbol (indicated by reference symbols Z1 and Z2 in the figure) is displayed. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth performance symbols" following the left, middle, and right performance symbols described above, and are variably displayed in synchronization with this while the performance symbol Hz is being displayed in a variable manner. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a "□" figure), and a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color, for example. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the miss (eg, white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is being performed correctly in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is something. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually a "big hit" or "small win" instead of a "miss", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 will be displayed in the corresponding manner (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). is stopped and displayed.

In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment performance symbols are stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner ("4"-"6"-"7").

In addition, in the storage display device 300, since all four LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 are lit, it indicates that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol storage Since all the LEDs in the display area M2 are off, this indicates that the number of second special symbols stored is zero.

[Fluctuating display performance starts]
(B) in FIG. 51: For example, in synchronization with the start of variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 is started, and the performance symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is scroll-varied. By doing so, the variable display effect will start. Incidentally, the variable display of the 7-segment performance symbols on the 7-segment display device 200 and the variable display of the performance symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are simply indicated by downward arrows.

A background image is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of a park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the presentation is, for example, "normal mode." "Normal mode" is a non-time saving state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and each mode has a different background image with a different scenery or scene. The differences between these modes correspond to internal "time reduction states". Although not particularly shown here, a preview effect may be performed by, for example, displaying images of characters, items, etc. on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Furthermore, during the variable display of the special symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is displayed in a variable manner at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color. .

[Example of performance when the number of working memories decreases]
As the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of lit LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from four to three in conjunction with this. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the memory of the first special symbol has been reduced to three, and the memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach clearly what has been done.

Also, before the fluctuation starts, the LED in the memory display area X1 is not lit, but after the fluctuation starts, the LED in the memory display area X1 lights up, and the fluctuation of the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed. It will continue to light up until.

[Left production pattern stop]
(C) in FIG. 51: For example, after a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has passed, the 7-segment effect pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 and the left side of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are first displayed. The production pattern stops changing. In this example, the effect pattern representing the number "8" is stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the number "8" is displayed as the left effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing is stopped.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 52: Next, the performance pattern representing the number “3” is stopped as the 7-segment performance pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the right performance pattern of the performance pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 The production pattern representing the number "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 52: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment presentation pattern on the 7-segment display device 200 will also be the presentation on the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the stop display effect for the symbol Hz is performed in a non-winning (losing) manner. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect pattern representing the number "1" is stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern in the center of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect pattern representing the number "1" is stopped as the middle effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing "1" is stopped. In this case, the combination of the 7-segment effect pattern on the 7-segment display device 200 and the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 are both out of the range of "8" - "1" - "3", so this fluctuation is normal. It is expressed in the production that it falls under the ``outlier'' category. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the miss (eg, white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the LED in the memory display area X1 is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to intuitively and easily instruct the player that ``the variation of the special symbols has ended''.

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (when not winning) that are performed for each change. Through such a performance, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the performance.

[Example of production when it corresponds to winning pattern 2]
FIGS. 53 to 56 are continuous diagrams showing examples of performance when the result of the normal symbol lottery in the non-time reduction state corresponds to the winning symbol 2.

[Before the start of variable display performance]
(A) in FIG. 53: In the 7-segment display device 200, the 7-segment performance symbols are stopped and displayed in an out-of-order manner (“9”-“1”-“6”). In addition, on the liquid crystal display 42, the effect pattern Hz is stopped and displayed in an off-center manner ("9"-"1"-"6").

In addition, in the memory display device 300, since one LED in the first special symbol memory display area M1 is lit, it indicates that the number of working memory of the first special symbol is one, and the second special symbol memory display Since all the LEDs in area M2 are off, this indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0.

[Fluctuating display effect starts]
(B) in FIG. 53: At the same time as the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the performance symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to display a variable display. The performance begins. As the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of variation, the number of lit LEDs in the first special symbol storage display area M1 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. In addition, it is assumed that the variation pattern of the first special symbol here is a variation pattern that results in a miss.

[Animal chance performance]
Furthermore, in the illustrated example, an effect is being executed in which an animal character appears from the upper left position of the screen. This performance is executed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of winning symbol 2 on the normal symbol display device 33. In this case, the variable start prize winning device 28 is opened for a long time (opened for 6.0 seconds) even though the time is not shortened.

[Occurrence of preview performance (1st stage)]
(C) in FIG. 53: After a while from the start of the fluctuation, a picture image displaying some kind of character appears on the screen, and a preview effect is executed in such a manner that it stops at the center of the screen. In this example, a pattern image appears from the left side of the screen and moves directly to the center of the screen.

In addition, the Animal Chance production continues, with an animal character uttering the line, ``Animal Chance, hit me right.'' In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is operating, and the game balls are flowing down toward the variable starting winning device 28.

[Occurrence of preview performance (second stage)]
(D) in FIG. 54: Following the first stage preview performance, the second stage preview performance is executed. In the illustrated example, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen and is displayed overlappingly in front of the previously displayed pattern image. By executing such a preview performance, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that the game may be a hit.

In addition, the Animal Chance production continues, with an animal character uttering the line, ``Animal Chance, hit me right.'' In the illustrated example, the variable start winning device 28 is activated and a game ball is entered.

[Left production pattern stop]
(E) in FIG. 54: Following the preview performance, the performance pattern representing the number “2” as a 7-segment performance pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200 has stopped, and the performance pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 has stopped. The effect pattern representing the number "2" is stopped as the left effect pattern.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the number of second special symbols stored increases by one, so one LED in the second special symbol storage display area M2 lights up.
The variable start prize winning device 28 becomes inactive after a certain period of time (6.0 seconds) has elapsed or when a prescribed number of prizes (for example, 1 prize) have been won. In the illustrated example, one game ball has entered the variable start winning device 28, so the variable starting winning device 28 is closed. When the variable start winning device 28 is closed, the animal chance presentation ends. Note that the prescribed number may be two or more.

[Right production pattern stop]
(F) in FIG. 54: Next, the performance pattern representing the number “4” has stopped as the 7-segment performance pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the right performance pattern of the performance pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 has stopped. The production pattern representing the number "4" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
(G) in FIG. 55: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missing) manner, the 7-segment presentation pattern on the 7-segment display device 200 will also be the presentation on the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, the stop display effect for the symbol Hz is performed in a non-winning (losing) manner. In the illustrated example, the effect pattern representing the number "3" is stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern in the center of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect pattern representing the number "3" is stopped as the effect pattern in the middle of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing “” is stopped.

[Fluctuating display performance starts]
(H) in FIG. 55: At the same time as the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the 7-segment performance symbol on the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates, resulting in a variable display performance. will be started. As the number of working memories of the second special symbol decreases by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of lit LEDs in the second special symbol memory display area M2 decreases from one to zero in conjunction with this. It is assumed here that a variation pattern of the second special symbol corresponding to the small winning is selected. Here, if the control of priority digestion of the second special symbol is adopted, the memory of the second special symbol is digested preferentially. On the other hand, when controlling the order of special symbols to be digested, the special symbols are changed in the order in which they are stored. In the illustrated example, since there is no memory of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which control is adopted.

[Left production pattern stop]
(I) in FIG. 55: After a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the effect pattern representing the number “5” has stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern on the left side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect pattern on the liquid crystal display 42 has stopped. The effect pattern representing the number "5" is stopped as the left effect pattern of Hz.

[Right production pattern stop]
(J) in FIG. 56: Next, the performance pattern representing the number “2” is stopped as the 7-segment performance pattern on the right side of the 7-segment display device 200, and the right performance pattern of the performance pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 The production pattern representing the number "2" is stopped.

[Medium production pattern stop]
(K) in FIG. 56: A stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is a small hit and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the 7-segment presentation pattern on the 7-segment display device 200 will also be the presentation pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. Similarly, a stop display effect is performed in the form of a small win. In the illustrated example, the effect pattern representing the alphabet "A" is stopped as the 7-segment effect pattern in the center of the 7-segment display device 200, and the effect pattern representing the alphabet "A" is displayed as the medium effect pattern of the effect pattern Hz on the liquid crystal display 42. The production pattern representing “” is stopped. Furthermore, animal characters are displayed in a large size on the liquid crystal display 42. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that he has won a small hit via the animal chance. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a small hit. After this, a small winning game is executed.

[Major role production]
FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of a big win effect executed during a jackpot game. It should be noted that the following big role effects are effects executed on the liquid crystal display 42.

[Jackpot game starts]
(A) in FIG. 57: When the jackpot game starts, for example, text information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a unique performance image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the jackpot game. .

[Indication of “right-handed hitter” during big role]
In addition, in this embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the game area 8a, the right side of the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big win. It is said that Therefore, under the control of the main control CPU 72, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed, and a firing position designation command indicating "right-handed hitting" is transmitted to the production control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (an arrow indicating the right direction, the words "hit right", etc.) that urges "hit right" is displayed on the display screen under the performance control by the performance control CPU 126.

[1st round]
(B) in FIG. 57: When the first round of the jackpot game starts, for example, three O marks are displayed along with the character information "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. The leftmost circle mark is displayed in red (diagonal hatching), and the remaining two circle marks are displayed in white. This indicates that there are 3 rounds in which a ball can be obtained, that the current round is the first of those 3 rounds, and that a circle mark will be displayed for each round in which a ball can be obtained. It is possible to teach the player that the information will be displayed in red.

Here, the number of "○ marks" increases according to the winning symbols. For example, if the winning symbol is the "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "3", but if the winning symbol is the "third winning symbol" In this case, the number of "○ marks" is "2". Also, if the winning symbol is the "4th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "9", and if the winning symbol is the "5th winning symbol", the number of "○ marks" is "9". The number of "○ marks" is "6", and when the winning symbol is the "6th winning symbol", the number of "○" is "3".

[3rd round]
(C) in FIG. 57: After this, when the jackpot game progresses smoothly and moves to the third round, for example, all three O marks are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all rounds in which balls can be won are completed in the third round.

[Time reduction state entry production]
(D) in FIG. 58: Then, using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game, an effect is executed in which character information such as "Enter drive mode!" is displayed. This allows the player to be informed that the "drive mode" is about to start. In addition, text information such as ``Keep hitting right'' is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and the player can be taught that the game can be played by hitting right even in the ``drive mode''.

Here, during the ending performance, notifications to remind people to forget to take out their prepaid cards, such as ``Be careful not to forget to take out your prepaid card,'' or messages to prevent people from becoming absorbed in the game, such as ``Be careful not to get absorbed in the game,'' are made. It is also possible to perform notification.

[Jackpot game ended, time shortened state]
(E) in Figure 58: When the jackpot game ends and the internal state (game state) is set to the time reduction state, the stay mode is set to "drive mode" and the background image changes to the car in which the woman was riding. The image will be changed to one that depicts driving on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (gaming state) is a time reduction state different from the normal state.

[Time-saving production]
In this manner, when the game is progressing in the time reduction state, a time reduction effect (advantageous gaming state effect) is executed in which a background image corresponding to the time reduction state (advantageous gaming state) is displayed.

[Right-handed hitting suggestion]
In addition, at the top of the screen, a right-handed hitting suggestion effect is being executed. In the right-handed hitting suggestion effect, right-handed character information and a rightward arrow symbol are displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Note that such a right-handed hitting suggestion performance may be continuously executed when the gaming state is the time shortening state, or may be executed only at the start of the time shortening state. By performing such a performance, it is possible to encourage the player to "hit the ball to the right."

[Remaining count display effect]
Further, at the bottom left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a remaining number of times display effect is being executed. In the remaining number of times display performance, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times the game can be played in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, information about "10 remaining sessions" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol changes and stops in the time reduction state, and is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol changes and stops in the non-time reduction state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol changes and stops in the time reduction state or non-time reduction state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
FIGS. 59 to 61 are continuous diagrams showing examples of drive mode effects.

(A) in FIG. 59: In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image depicting a car in which a woman is riding driving on the ground. The combination of 7-segment performance symbols displayed on the 7-segment display device 200 is "7"-"7"-"7", and the combination of the performance symbols Hz on the liquid crystal display 42 is "7"-"7". ” - “7” is the winning number. This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the top of the screen, a right-handed game suggestion performance is being executed, and such a right-handed game suggestion performance is continuously executed when the gaming state is in the time reduction state.

[Special pattern change starts]
(B) in FIG. 59: At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, one memory of the first special symbol is stored (one LED in the first special symbol storage display area M1 is lit). Therefore, when entering the drive mode in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, if the memory of the first special symbol is not stored, the variation of the second special symbol is first executed by the player performing a right hit. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z1 on the liquid crystal display 42 also start to fluctuate. Start. Here, it is assumed that the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol falls under the losing category.

[End of 1st special symbol variation]
(C) in FIG. 59: When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a missed manner, the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200, the performance symbol Hz on the liquid crystal display 42, and the 4th symbol on the liquid crystal display 42 Z1 is also stopped and displayed in a different manner. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28 opens, and four gaming balls enter the right starting winning opening 28b. . In this case, four second special symbols are stored (all four LEDs in the second special symbol display area M2 are lit).

Here, since the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as 10 times remaining.

(D) in FIG. 60: Since the memory of the second special symbol is digested with priority over the memory of the first special symbol, the internal lottery is executed next using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 starts to fluctuate, and the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 on the liquid crystal display 42 also start to fluctuate. Start. Here, it is assumed that a small hit has been won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Small winning starts, second big prize opening opens]
(E) in FIG. 60: Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the 7-segment performance symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 (combination of "5" - "2" - "6") , the performance symbol Hz (combination of “5”-“2”-“6”) on the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small winning manner. . As a result, a small winning game is started, and the second big prize opening 31b is opened. When this happens, the car in which the female character is riding increases speed and moves toward the right side of the screen.

Here, since the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the remaining number of times is displayed as a subtraction. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as 9 times remaining.

(F) in FIG. 60: When the small winning game is started, an effect is executed in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim for the attacker at the bottom right." Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the game ball must enter the second variable winning device 31.

[Passage through specific area]
(G) in FIG. 61: The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the 6th winning symbol. do. In this example, a female character riding in a car holds up a heart mark with a letter V drawn on it and utters lines such as "You did it! BIG BONUS!!". Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a jackpot game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, jackpot game starts]
(H) in FIG. 61: After that, the small winning game ends and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, the jackpot game is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game. In this example, a female character unique to jackpot games appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Keep hitting right" is displayed together with an arrow pointing to the right, and the player can be taught that the jackpot game will proceed by hitting right.

Thereafter, the process advances to (B) in FIG. 57, where the performance during the jackpot game similar to that described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of the small hit regarding the second special symbol corresponds to the sixth winning symbol, it is possible to obtain balls for substantially three rounds. Incidentally, when a jackpot game is executed in the drive mode, a special winning effect during the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

FIGS. 62 and 63 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when the second special symbol changes in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state. Such a situation occurs mainly when the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated even though the final variation of the time shortening state results in a miss.

Here, it is assumed that four second special symbols are stored before the second special symbol starts changing. For this reason, the short-time production continues to be performed. In addition, as the remaining number of times display effect, information "4 times remaining" is displayed. However, the right-handed hitting hint has not been executed.

[During special design fluctuation display]
(A) in FIG. 62: When the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the drive mode in the non-time reduction state, the 7-segment effect symbol on the 7-segment display device 200 starts to vary accordingly, and the liquid crystal display The performance pattern Hz of the device 42 and the fourth pattern Z2 also start to fluctuate. Note that the situation here is not a time shortening state, so even if the starting gate 20 is passed, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is low. For this reason, it is difficult for the variable start winning device 28 to shift to the open state, and basically it is not possible to store the memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time saving state becomes a chance zone where the second special symbol changes up to four times.

[Stop display effect]
(B) in FIG. 62: Here, it is assumed that a small hit has been won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small win mode, the 7-segment presentation symbol (a combination of “2”-“2”-“3”) on the 7-segment display device 200, and the presentation on the liquid crystal display 42. The symbol Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) on the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in a small winning manner. In this case, an effect is performed in which the animal character holds up a "mark on which the number 7 is displayed."

Here, since the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the remaining number of times is displayed as a subtraction. Specifically, the remaining number of times is displayed as 3 times remaining.

[Small winning starts, second big prize opening opens]
Figure 62 (C): Then, when the small winning game starts, the second big prize opening 31b is opened and the car in which the female character is riding speeds up and moves towards the right side of the screen. executed. At this time, a performance is performed in which the animal characters are left behind.

[Passage through specific area]
(D) in FIG. 63: The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small winning is the fourth winning symbol. do. In this example, a female character riding in a car holds up a heart mark with a letter V drawn on it and utters lines such as "You did it! BIG BONUS!!". Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that a jackpot game (BIG BONUS) is about to start.

[Small win ends, jackpot game starts]
(E) in FIG. 63: After that, the small winning game ends and the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, the jackpot game is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small win game. In this example, a female character unique to jackpot games appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the female character utters similar lines. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Keep hitting right" is displayed together with an arrow pointing to the right, and the player can be taught that the jackpot game will proceed by hitting right. Thereafter, the process advances to (B) in FIG. 57, where the performance during the jackpot game similar to that described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses.

FIGS. 64 to 67 are diagrams illustrating a first example of a repeated button press effect executed during a ready-to-reach effect. The first performance example is a performance example when the player presses (repeatly hits) the push button 45a in an orderly manner. The push button 45a may be configured to accept operation input as if pressing repeatedly by pressing it for a long time.The push button 45a can be set to an automatic pressing function at the start of the game or during the game. The operation input may be accepted without pressing 45a.

(A) in FIG. 64: A variable display effect is being performed by the 7-segment display device 200 and the liquid crystal display 42.

(B) in FIG. 64: When a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the ready-to-win effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the performance symbol Hz and the 7-segment performance symbol are displayed in a ready-to-reach state (Tenpai) ("5" - "Fluctuating" - "5").

(C) in FIG. 64: The reach effect is in progress. In the illustrated example, an ally character (female character) is displayed on the left side of the screen, an enemy character (animal character) is displayed on the right side of the screen, and text information of "VS" is displayed in the center. In this situation, if an ally character wins, it will be a jackpot.

[SU1]
(D) in FIG. 65: When a certain period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-reach state has occurred, a button press effect is started. Specifically, a button image imitating the push button 45a is displayed in the center of the screen. A time meter is displayed around the button image to indicate the elapse of the effective time of the button press effect, and here, one square corresponds to about one second. In the illustrated example, since all eight time meters are displayed as colored images, pressing the push button 45a will be effective for about eight seconds from now. In other words, the effective time of the button press effect is 8 seconds. Note that each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time one second passes.

Further, at the bottom of the screen, a horizontally long bar-shaped meter M having four squares is displayed. The meter M is a physical strength meter that indicates the remaining physical strength of the enemy character. When all the colored parts of the meter M are gone, the enemy character has no remaining health, and the ally character wins.
When the player presses the push button 45a once and the condition for advancing the meter M is satisfied during the execution of the button continuous press performance, a performance (progress performance) in which the colored part of the meter value M decreases is performed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, an animal character is displayed that utters the line "Continuous Hits.""SU1" is the first stage of the button press effect.

[SU2]
(E) in FIG. 65: Then, the player starts hitting the push button 45a repeatedly, and here it is assumed that the condition for advancing the meter M by one position is satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M decreases by one square. "SU2" is the second stage of the button press effect. Note that when the player presses the push button 45a, an image of an ally character attacking is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the press of the push button 45a is output, and a message appears above the button image indicating that the push button 45a has been pressed. An image of a fist is displayed to indicate that the
Furthermore, in the illustrated example, 6 of the 8 squares of the time meter are displayed as colored images, so the effective time of the push button 45a is about 6 seconds remaining.

[SU3]
(F) in FIG. 65: The player continues to press the push button 45a repeatedly, and here it is assumed that the condition for advancing the meter M by one more position is satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU3" is the third stage of the button press effect.
Furthermore, in the illustrated example, since 4 squares of the 8 square time meters are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is about 4 seconds remaining.

[SU4]
(G) in FIG. 66: The player continues to press the push button 45a repeatedly, and here it is assumed that the condition for advancing the meter M by one more position is satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU4" is the fourth stage of the button press effect.
Furthermore, in the illustrated example, two of the eight squares of the time meter are displayed as colored images, so the effective time of the push button 45a is about two seconds remaining.

〔success〕
(H) in FIG. 66: The player continues to press the push button 45a repeatedly, and here it is assumed that the condition for advancing the meter M by one more position is satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "Success" is the final stage of the button-mashing performance.
As a result, all colored portions of the meter M disappear. In this case, an accessory falling effect in which the movable body 40f falls to the center of the screen is executed, and the meter M displays text information of "success".
Note that the time meter indicating the effective time of the push button 45a is not displayed.

(I) in FIG. 66: When a successful result is obtained in the button continuous press effect, a winning effect indicating that the current fluctuation is a jackpot is executed. In the illustrated example, an ally character is displayed in a large size and an enemy character leaves. In this case, the first special symbol, the performance symbol Hz, the 7-segment performance symbol, and the fourth symbol 1 are stopped and displayed in a winning manner.

The above is an example of a performance when the button repetition performance is successful, but when the button repetition performance is unsuccessful, the following example of performance is used.

[SU4]
(J) in FIG. 67: The player continues to press the push button 45a repeatedly, and here it is assumed that the condition for advancing the meter M by one more position is satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M is further reduced by one square. "SU4" is the fourth stage of the button press effect.
Furthermore, in the illustrated example, two of the eight squares of the time meter are displayed as colored images, so the effective time of the push button 45a is about two seconds remaining.

[Failure]
(K) in FIG. 67: It is assumed that the player continues to press the push button 45a repeatedly, and the condition for advancing the meter M by one more position is not satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M is maintained.
As a result, only one square of the colored portion of the meter M remains. In this case, the effect of falling objects is not executed, but the effect of the enemy character repelling the attack of the friendly character is executed, and the text information of "failure" is displayed on the meter M.
Note that such a presentation of failure may be executed before the valid time expires, at the same time as the valid time expires, or may be executed after the valid time expires.

(L) in FIG. 67: When a failure result is obtained in the button press effect, a failure effect indicating that the current fluctuation is a failure is executed. In the illustrated example, an effect is performed in which friendly characters are displayed small and enemy characters are displayed large. In this case, the first special symbol, the performance symbol Hz, the 7-segment performance symbol, and the fourth symbol 1 are stopped and displayed in a mismatched manner.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a second performance example of a repeated button press performance executed during a ready-to-reach performance. The second performance example is a performance example when the player does not press the push button 45a properly.

[SU1]
(A) in FIG. 68: A certain period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-reach state occurred, and a repeated button press effect is being executed. However, here it is assumed that the player has not pressed the push button 45a.
Furthermore, in the illustrated example, since all eight time meters are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is approximately 8 seconds remaining.

[SU1]
(B) in FIG. 68: Unless the player presses the push button 45a, the colored portion of the meter M will not decrease. However, the effective time of the button press effect is gradually decreasing.
In the illustrated example, two of the eight time meters are displayed as colored images, so the effective time of the push button 45a is about two seconds remaining.

[SU2]
(C) in FIG. 68: Then, it is assumed that the player starts repeatedly hitting the push button 45a just before the valid time of the button repeatedly pressing effect ends. Then, due to the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later, the condition for moving the meter M by one step is forcibly satisfied. In this case, an effect is performed in which the colored portion of the meter M decreases by one square.

In this way, even if the player starts repeatedly hitting the push button 45a just before the valid time ends, the stage of the button repeatedly hitting performance will only progress one step at a time until the valid time ends. Note that after this, when the valid time ends, the performance when winning or the performance when losing is executed.

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a third performance example of a repeated button press performance executed during a ready-to-reach performance. The third performance example is a performance example when the player operates the lever member 45b.

[SU1]
(A) in FIG. 69: A certain period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-reach state occurred, and a repeated button press effect is being executed. However, here it is assumed that the player has not pressed the push button 45a.
In the illustrated example, since all eight time meters are displayed as colored images, the effective time of the push button 45a is approximately 8 seconds remaining.

(B) in FIG. 69: Here, it is assumed that the player operates the lever member 45b instead of the push button 45a.

〔success〕
(C) in FIG. 69: By operating the lever member 45b, the player can suddenly know the final result.
When the success scenario is selected, an accessory falling effect is executed in which the movable body 40f falls in the center of the screen, and a special notification effect is executed in which character information of "success" is displayed on the meter M. After this, such special notification effects will continue to be performed until the valid time has elapsed, and after the valid time has elapsed, the winning effects (such as the effect of aligning three performance symbols, etc.) will be executed. be done.

In addition, if a failure scenario is selected, the effect of falling objects will not be executed, but the effect of the enemy character repelling the attack of the friendly character will be executed, and a special announcement will be made in which the character information "Failure" will be displayed on the meter M. The performance is executed. After this, such special notification effects will continue to be executed until the effective time has elapsed, and after the effective time has elapsed, the effect at the time of failure (such as a effect that does not align three performance symbols) will be executed. be done.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be explained. The above-mentioned variable display performance, reach performance, advance preview performance before reach occurrence, large role mid-game performance, performance using the liquid crystal display 42, 7-segment display 200, and memory display device 300, time-saving mid-game performance, right-hand hitting suggestion performance, remaining number of times. Display effects, button press effects, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the production control process executed by the production control CPU 126. This production control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The performance control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (eg, several tens of μs to several ms cycle) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The production control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), working memory production management processing (step S401), production symbol management processing (step S402), other production processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction (step S402a), and 7-segment display device. Production management processing (step S403), normal symbol production management processing (step S403a), button repeated production management processing (step S403b), display output processing (step S404), lamp drive processing (step S406), sound drive processing (step S408) ), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). The basic flow of the production control process will be explained below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the production control CPU 126 receives a production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. In addition, the production control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them by type in the command buffer area of the RAM 130. In addition, the production commands sent from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special symbol destination determination production command, a (special symbol) production command when the number of working memories increases, a production command when the number of working memories (special symbols) decreases, and a start command. Opening prize sound control command, demonstration production command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state specification command, number of rounds command, firing position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect commands, variable pattern destination determination commands, stop display time end commands, number-of-time counter commands, various error commands, variable start prize winning device long open start commands, etc.

Step S401: In the working memory performance management process, the performance control CPU 126 controls the execution of the performance using the storage display device 300. The contents of the working memory performance management process will be further described later with reference to other drawings.

Step S402: In the performance symbol management process, the performance control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display performance and the stop display performance using the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and controls the content of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable It also controls the contents of the presentation when the winning device 31 opens and closes. In addition, in this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects performance patterns for various preview performances (pre-ready notice performance before reach occurrence, notice performance after reach occurrence, etc.). In this manner, in the performance symbol management process, the performance control CPU 126 controls the performance contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 (performance symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, performance contents related to the performance during the big role, etc., contents of various preview performances). Execute the process to determine. Note that the specific details of the processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The performance control CPU 126 executes other performance processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process for determining performance contents regarding the right-handed hit suggestion performance, the remaining number of times display performance, and the like. Note that the specific details of the processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the 7-segment display device performance management process, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process to control the 7-segment display device 200 based on the performance content determined in the performance symbol management process. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 executes processing for determining the performance content (content related to the 7-segment performance symbols) to be displayed on the 7-segment display device 200. It is preferable that the performance symbol Hz and the 7-segment performance symbol basically perform the same motion, but they may perform different motions. If different actions are to be performed, for example, the timings at which the performance symbols Hz and the 7-segment performance symbols stop may be made different, or the symbols to be stopped may be made different.

Step S403a: In the normal symbol performance management process, the performance control CPU 126 controls the performance (animal chance performance) when a chance state for the second special symbol occurs. Specifically, during the period from receiving the variable start winning device long open start command until the variable start winning device 28 closes, the performance control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a performance pattern for executing the animal chance performance. do.

Step S403b: In the button repetition performance management process, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process for controlling the contents regarding the button repetition performance.

By executing this process, the production control CPU 126 uses the push button 45a and the lever member 45b to execute a button continuous press production (stage production) that progresses the stage of the production step by step from the first stage to the final stage. (step performance execution means).

In addition, by executing this process, the production control CPU 126 can control the effect of the effect ( If the lever member is not operated (unless the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later) is greater than or equal to a certain number, the stage of the button press performance is advanced according to the first progress mode, and if a predetermined condition is met ( If the lever member is operated (if the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex, which will be described later) is greater than or equal to a certain number, then a progression performance is executed that advances the stages of the button-hitting performance in a second progression mode that is different from the first progression mode. (progress performance execution means).

The first proceeding mode is a mode in which the stage of the button press performance is advanced one stage at a time to the next stage in accordance with the elapse of the valid time.
The second proceeding mode when the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more is a mode in which the stage of the button press performance is advanced one stage at a time, regardless of the elapse of the valid time.
The second progress mode that is executed when the lever member is operated is a mode that executes a special notification effect (progress effect execution means).

Step S404: In the display output process, the performance control CPU 126 sends the performance display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to the basic control information of the performance content (for example, the number of operating memories for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , working memory performance pattern number, look-ahead preview performance pattern number, variable performance pattern number, variable time preview performance number, background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP 152) controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, etc. (turns on or off, flashes, changes brightness gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the performance control CPU 126 sends the sound drive circuit 134 the performance contents (for example, BGM, audio data, etc. during a variable display performance, a reach performance, a mode transition performance, a jackpot performance, etc.). Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the performance.

Step S410: In the performance random number update process, the performance control CPU 126 updates various performance random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for preview selection, random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the performance control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a driving source, and performs effects in synchronization with the image display on the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above performance control processing, the performance control CPU 126 can control the performance content in the pachinko machine 1 in an integrated manner. Next, the contents of the performance symbol management process executed in the performance control process will be explained.

[Working memory performance management processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of working memory performance management processing. The contents will be explained below along with an example procedure.

Step S700: First, the performance control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the performance command for increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the performance command for increasing the number of working memories is stored. If it is confirmed that the effect command when increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. In addition, if it cannot be confirmed that the performance command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the performance control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The production control CPU 126 executes production selection processing when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects a performance that lights up one LED in the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED in the second special symbol storage display area M2. In addition, in this process, the performance control CPU 126 can determine the performance pattern and performance scenario of the color change performance (for example, the display color of the LED in the storage display area X1 and the display color of the LED in the performance display area X2). can.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories decreases has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the performance command when the number of working memories decreases is stored. When it is confirmed that the performance command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S706. Note that if it cannot be confirmed that the performance command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: No), the performance control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The production control CPU 126 executes production selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the production control CPU 126 selects a production that turns off one LED in the first special symbol storage display area M1 or one LED in the second special symbol storage display area M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery. , selects an effect that lights up the LED in the memory display area X1. Note that the LED in the storage display area X1 is selected to be turned off at the time when the variation of the special symbol is completed. In addition, when the LED in the performance display area X2 is turned on, the LED in the performance display area X2 is also selected to be turned off at the time when the variation of the special symbol is completed.
After completing the above procedure, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the performance control process (FIG. 70).

[Production design management processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the production symbol management process. The production symbol management process includes execution selection processing (step S500), production symbol variation pre-processing (step S502), production symbol variation processing (step S504), production symbol stop display processing (step S506), and variable winning device operation time. The configuration includes a subroutine group of processing (step S508). The basic flow of the production symbol management process will be explained below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the performance control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the performance control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and also sets the end of the performance symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the fluctuating display performance has not yet started, the performance control CPU 126 selects the performance symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the production symbol fluctuation pre-processing has already been completed, the production control CPU 126 selects the production symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the production symbol variation processing has been completed, then The effect pattern stop display processing (step S506) is selected as the jump destination. Further, the variable winning device activation process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 23) is selected by the main control CPU72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the performance symbol variation preprocessing, the performance control CPU 126 performs work to prepare conditions for starting a variable display performance using the performance symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. In addition, in this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach performance according to various conditions (lottery results, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), or selects the content of the reach performance regarding the preview performance (reach (pre-event notice pattern, post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also controls demonstration production when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. Note that the specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the production symbol variation process, production control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct production display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing a performance using the push button 45a or lever member 45b during execution of a variable display performance, the performance control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player operates the performance button, and depending on the result, the performance content ( The display control CPU 146 is instructed to control information for the button press effect).

Step S506: In the performance symbol stop display process, the performance control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display performance according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the performance control CPU 126 instructs the performance display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display performance and execute the stop display performance. In response to this, the performance display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display performance that has been executed up to that point on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display performance. As a result, the stop display effect is executed approximately in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and it is possible to visually teach (disclose, announce, notify, etc.) the result of the internal lottery to the player (execution of the symbol effect). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the performance control CPU 126 controls the content of the performance during the small win game or the jackpot game. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects the content of the performance during the big win according to various conditions (for example, winning type). Note that the specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for production pattern variation]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the production symbol variation pre-processing. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S600: The production control CPU 126 checks whether a demonstration production command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether or not a demonstration production command is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the demonstration performance command is saved (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The production control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects a demonstration performance pattern. The demonstration performance pattern defines the content of the performance indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.
Note that the presentation indicating the customer waiting state may include content to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as ``Be careful not to become addicted to the game.'' By doing so, it is possible to easily perform effects related to preventing players from becoming addicted to the game at an appropriate timing, thereby reducing disadvantages to the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the performance symbol management process. The performance control CPU 126 then returns to the performance control process, and controls the content of the demonstration performance based on the demonstration performance pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 70) and lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 70). do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration production command is not saved (No), production control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The performance control CPU 126 checks whether the current change is a loss (non-winning). Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the lottery result command for non-winning is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the non-winning lottery result command is saved (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command for non-winning is not saved (No), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S606. In addition, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a loss based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a missed normal variation or a missed reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a missed variation. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (loss) (Step S604: No), then the performance control CPU 126 checks whether the current change is a jackpot. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether the lottery result command for the jackpot is stored. As a result, if it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the jackpot is saved (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the jackpot is not saved (No), only the lottery result command for the small win remains, so in this case, the production control CPU 126 executes step S608. In addition, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a jackpot variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot. Furthermore, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

Step S608: The production control CPU 126 executes a small winning variation production pattern selection process. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 determines the current performance pattern number based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The production pattern number is prepared in advance in correspondence with the variable pattern command, and the production control CPU 126 can refer to a production pattern selection table (not shown) and select the production pattern number corresponding to the variable pattern command at that time. can. Note that the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variable pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variable pattern command.

In addition, when a performance pattern number is selected, the performance control CPU 126 refers to a performance table (not shown), and changes the performance pattern Hz corresponding to the fluctuation performance pattern number at that time, the fluctuation schedule (variation time) of the fourth symbol Z1, Z2, and the stoppage. Determine the display mode, etc.

For example, when the second special symbol hits small in the time shortened state, the production control CPU 126 changes the production symbol Hz, the 7-segment production symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state, and finally changes the small hit. Processing is executed to select a performance pattern for stopping and displaying the performance symbol Hz, the 7-segment performance symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to a hit.

On the other hand, when the small hit of the second special symbol changes in the non-time reduction state, the production control CPU 126 controls the production symbol Hz, the 7-segment production symbol, and the fourth A process is executed to select a performance pattern in which the pattern Z2 is changed and finally the performance pattern Hz, the 7-segment performance pattern, and the fourth pattern Z2 corresponding to a small hit are stopped and displayed.

The above procedure is for the case where the game corresponds to a "small hit", but when the game corresponds to a jackpot, the production control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "jackpot" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the production control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The performance control CPU 126 executes a jackpot time-varying performance pattern selection process. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 determines the current performance pattern number based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In addition, in the jackpot performance pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbols. For example, when a variable pattern corresponding to a reach effect (such as a reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern) is selected, the effect control CPU 126 can select a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character are pitted against each other. Incidentally, this point also applies when there is a miss or a small hit.

In addition, in the case of non-election, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 126 confirms that it is a failure in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The performance control CPU 126 executes the off-time variation performance pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of failure based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The performance pattern numbers when the game is off are classified into "normal deviation fluctuations", "short time deviation fluctuations", "missing reach fluctuations", etc., and detailed reach fluctuation patterns are defined for the "missing reach fluctuations". In addition, which performance pattern number the performance control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the production pattern number at the time of a miss is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to a production table (not shown), and determines the variation schedule (variation time and reach Determine whether or not a reach occurs, (if a reach occurs, the reach type and timing), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7" - "2" - "4", etc.). Note that the method for determining the effect when the game is a loss is the same when the game is a jackpot.

When determining the fluctuating performance patterns for small hits, jackpots, and misses, the performance pattern of pseudo-continuous preview performances (pseudo-continuous) can also be determined.

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the production control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The performance control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice performance execution means). In this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects by lottery the content of the preview performance to be executed during the current variable display performance. The content of the preview performance is determined based on, for example, the result of an internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time shortened state). As mentioned above, the preview performance is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display performance, or to notify the player that there is a possibility of a jackpot or small win in the end. . Therefore, when the game is not won, the selection ratio of the preview performance is set low, but when the game is won, the selection ratio of the preview performance is set higher than when the game is not won, in order to increase the player's expectations.

Step S616: The performance control CPU 126 executes mode performance management processing (advantageous gaming state performance execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the production control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is in a non-time saving state, and when the internal state is in a time saving state, A process for selecting a background image corresponding to the drive mode (a process for selecting a time-saving medium effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the production control CPU 126 can make an exception if the memory of the second special symbol exists when transitioning from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state, even if the internal state is the non-time reduction state. , a background image corresponding to the drive mode is selected (advantageous gaming state effect execution means, advantageous gaming state effect continuation execution means). Incidentally, such an exceptional process is executed in the effect pattern stop display process which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the performance symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent performance symbol variation process (step S504 in FIG. 72), the variable display performance and the stop display performance are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation performance pattern (symbol performance execution means), A preview performance is executed based on various preview performance patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Processing during production pattern stop display]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the process during production symbol stop display. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S650: The performance control CPU 126 checks whether the internal state is in the time reduction mode (time reduction state). Specifically, the production control CPU 126 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command. Note that the internal state can also be confirmed using a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

As a result, if it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving mode (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S652, and if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving mode (No), the production control CPU 126 executes the step S652. Execute S656.

Step S652: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether it is the time saving final variation. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks the number-of-times-cutting counter command, thereby being able to check whether or not it is the time-saving final variation. For example, if it is a change when the first number cutting counter value or the second number cutting counter value switches from "1" to "0", the performance control CPU 126 can determine that it is the final time saving variation.

As a result, if it is confirmed that it is the time saving final variation (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S654, and if it cannot be confirmed that it is the time saving final variation (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S666. .

Step S654: The performance control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the number of stored second special symbols in the pseudo time saving counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the number of stored second special symbols is "0", "0" is set to the pseudo time saving counter and the number of stored second special symbols is "1". ”, the pseudo time saving counter is set to “1”, and when the number of stored second special symbols is “4”, the pseudo time saving counter is set to “4”.
After completing this process, the production control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The performance control CPU 126 checks whether the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S666, and if it is not confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S666. Execute S658.

Step S658: The production control CPU 126 checks whether the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 or not.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S660, and confirms that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time saving counter is 0, the production control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The performance control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background to a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time-saving background is a background in a drive mode in which right-handed hitting is not displayed.

By executing such processing, the production control CPU 126 keeps the value of the pseudo time saving counter even if the time saving state (advantageous gaming state) ends and transitions to the non-time saving state (predetermined gaming state). If the value is greater than 0 (when special conditions are met), the time-saving medium performance (advantageous gaming state performance) can be continuously executed (advantageous gaming state performance continuation execution means) .

Step S662: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time saving counter.

Step S664: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background to the normal background. The normal background is the background in normal mode.

Step S666: The production control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the performance control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display performance in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery.

When the above processing is finished, the production control CPU 126 returns to the production symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Processing when variable prize winning device is activated]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of processing when the variable prize winning device is activated. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S800: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the current variation is a jackpot. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a jackpot or a small win. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this variation is a jackpot (Yes), the production control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this variation is not a jackpot (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the production control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The performance control CPU 126 executes a process when the variable winning device is activated at the time of a jackpot. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects a performance pattern to be executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 displays various image data regarding the performance pattern at the time of a jackpot, which is stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the performance display control device 144 (VDP 152), as the performance during the big win to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Execute reading processing according to the winning symbol.

Step S804: The production control CPU 126 executes a process when the variable prize winning device is activated at the time of a small hit. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 selects a performance pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the production control CPU 126 selects a production pattern indicating that the small winning game has started (for example, a production in which a car in which a female character is riding speeds up) at the start of the small winning game, and suggests a right-handed hit. If the game ball passes through a specific area 31 Execute the process of selecting the desired performance.

After completing the above procedure, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the performance symbol management process (FIG. 72).

[Other production processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for other performance processing during time reduction and pseudo time reduction. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Here, time saving (time saving) is a time saving state, and pseudo time saving (pseudo time saving) is a state in which a background image of time saving in a non-time saving state is displayed (in a non-time saving state). drive mode).

Step S850: The production control CPU 126 checks whether the internal state is in the time reduction mode (time reduction state). Specifically, the production control CPU 126 can check the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking the state designation command.

As a result, if the internal state is confirmed to be time saving (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S852 and step S854, and if it is not confirmed that the internal state is time saving (No), production control CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The performance control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, checks the number-of-time counter command, and selects a performance pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "4" to the second number-of-time counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the processing to be performed. As a result, during the time saving period, a value of "10 times remaining to 5 times remaining" or "100 times remaining to 5 times remaining" is displayed as the remaining number of times in the remaining times display effect.

Step S854: The production control CPU 126 executes a right-handed hitting suggestion production selection process. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a performance pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed hit suggestion performance at the top of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The performance control CPU 126 executes a right-handed hit emphasis performance selection process. Specifically, when it becomes necessary to execute a right-handed hitting emphasis effect, for example, if the player continues to play left-handed hitting even though the time has been shortened, the performance control CPU 126 controls the display on the liquid crystal display. Processing is executed to select a performance pattern for displaying an image corresponding to a performance emphasizing right-handed hitting at the top of the screen of the device 42.

Step S856: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether the internal state is in a pseudo time reduction mode. The performance control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress when the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the internal state is in a pseudo time reduction mode (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S858, and if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in a pseudo time reduction mode (No), the production control CPU 126 returns to the production control process (FIG. 70).

Step S858: The performance control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display processing based on the pseudo time saving counter. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a performance pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time saving counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, during the pseudo time saving, the value of "4 remaining to 1 remaining (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number of times display effect.

When the above processing is finished, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the performance control process (FIG. 70).

[Button continuous press production management processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for button repetition production management processing. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S860: The production control CPU 126 checks whether the current state is the state before the start of variation (at the time of start of variation, the timing to execute production symbol variation pre-processing).

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current state is the state before the start of variation (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S861. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the state before the start of variation (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S862.

Step S861: The production control CPU 126 executes a button continuous press production selection process. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the button-hitting performance, and if it is determined to execute the button-hitting performance, determines the content of the performance of the button-hitting performance.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether or not to perform the button-hitting performance based on the fluctuation pattern, the variable display performance, the contents of the preview performance, and the like. When it is determined to perform the button press effect, a process is executed to determine what kind of button press effect to be executed at what timing and schedule.

Step S862: The performance control CPU 126 confirms whether the current state is the start of the button continuous press performance. The start time of the repeated button press effect is the timing at which the repeated button press effect is actually started. Whether or not it is the start time of the repeated button press effect can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the variation while referring to the execution timing of the repeated button press effect.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current state is the time to start the button press performance (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S863. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the start of the button-hitting performance (No), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S864.

Step S863: The production control CPU 126 executes a process at the start of the button continuous press production.
In this process, the performance control CPU 126 executes processes such as selecting the content of the performance to be displayed at the start of the button-hitting performance and setting the valid time of the button.

Step S864: The performance control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current state is that a button-hitting performance is being executed. The execution of the button multiple press effect means that the button multiple press effect is actually being executed. Whether or not the repeated button press effect is being executed can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the variation while referring to the execution timing of the repeated button press effect.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current state is that the button repetition effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S865. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is that the button press effect is being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S866.

Step S865: The production control CPU 126 executes a process during button press production execution.
In this process, a process is executed to select the content of the effect to be displayed while the button repeated press effect is being executed.

Step S866: The performance control CPU 126 checks whether the current state is the end of the button continuous press performance. The end of the button press effect is the timing at which the button press effect actually ends. Whether or not it is the end of the repeated button press effect can be confirmed by counting the elapsed time from the start of the variation while referring to the execution timing of the repeated button press effect.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current state is the end of the button press performance (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S867. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the end of the button press effect (No), the process returns to the effect control process (FIG. 70).

Step S867: The performance control CPU 126 executes a process at the end of the button continuous press performance.
In this process, a process is executed to select the content of the effect to be displayed at the end of the repeated button press effect.

When the above processing is finished, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the performance control process (FIG. 70).

[Button multiple press production selection process]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for selecting a repeated button press effect. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S870: The performance control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether the performance execution conditions for the button continuous press performance are satisfied. The performance execution conditions for the button press performance include, for example, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than a predetermined time is selected, or a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character compete (a reach variation pattern, etc.) is selected. In some cases, the condition may be satisfied. Note that even if the ready-to-reach effect is not selected, the button-hitting effect may be executed.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the performance execution conditions for the button continuous press performance are satisfied (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S872. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the performance execution conditions for the button-hitting performance are satisfied (No), the performance control CPU 126 returns to the button-hitting performance management process (FIG. 77).

Step S872: The production control CPU 126 executes a process to check whether the current variation is a variation corresponding to a jackpot.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation corresponding to a jackpot (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S874. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the current variation is a variation corresponding to a jackpot (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S876.

Step S874: The production control CPU 126 executes a success scenario selection process. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a success scenario for notifying a successful result in the button-hitting performance. Note that if there is a success scenario table storing a plurality of success scenarios, any one success scenario is selected from among them.

Step S876: The production control CPU 126 executes failure scenario selection processing. In this process, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a failure scenario for notifying the result of failure in the button repeated performance. Note that if there is a failure scenario table storing a plurality of failure scenarios, any one failure scenario is selected from among them.

When the above processing is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press performance management process (FIG. 77).

[Processing at the start of button press production]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing at the start of a button press effect. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S877: The performance control CPU 126 executes a scenario setting process for the button-hitting performance. In this process, the process of setting the success scenario or failure scenario selected in the process of step S874 or step S876 in FIG. 78 is executed. A button press effect is executed based on the scenario set in this process.

Step S878: The production control CPU 126 executes a valid time setting process. In this embodiment, the effective time of the push button is 8 seconds (240 frames). The effective time is subtracted over time from the start of the button press effect, and ends when it reaches 0 seconds. The elapsed time of the valid time is displayed by a time meter displayed around the button image.

Step S879: The production control CPU 126 executes a production selection process at the start of a button continuous press production. Specifically, the performance control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a performance pattern such as displaying a button image, displaying a time meter, or displaying a meter M as a performance at the start of a repeated button press performance. .
In this case, as for the button image to be displayed, one of the button image patterns may be selected from a plurality of button image patterns depending on the degree of expectation of winning. This allows button images that have the same shape but different colors and sizes to be displayed.
When the above processing is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press performance management process (FIG. 77).

[Processing during button press production]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a process during execution of a button press effect. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S880: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether the button has been pressed. Whether or not the button has been pressed can be confirmed by whether or not a contact signal from the push button 45a is input to the production control device 124.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the button has been pressed (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S881. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the button has been pressed (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S882.

Step S881: The production control CPU 126 executes button press processing. Specifically, a process is executed to determine the content of the effect to be executed when the push button 45a is pressed.

Step S882: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether a lever input has been made. Whether or not a lever input has been made can be confirmed by whether or not a contact signal from the lever member 45b is input to the production control device 124.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the lever input has been made (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S883. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the lever input has been made (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press effect management process (FIG. 77).

Step S883: The production control CPU 126 executes lever input processing. Specifically, a process is executed to determine the content of the performance to be performed when the lever member 45b is operated.
When the above processing is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press performance management process (FIG. 77).

[Button press processing]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for button pressing processing. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S910: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of calculating the current "maximum variation value (MaxIndex)" of the index of the referenced scenario from the number of frames that have passed since the start of the effective time. The number of frames that have passed since the start of the valid time can be confirmed by counting the number of frames that have passed since the start of the valid time of the button press effect.
The "maximum variation value (MaxIndex)" is basically a value that is updated to a larger value as time passes, although it depends on the scenario being referred to.

For example, assuming that the referenced scenario is a success scenario, if the "number of elapsed frames" is "60 frames", "MaxIndex" is "4", and the "number of elapsed frames" is "120 frames". If so, "MaxIndex" is "8" (see (A) in FIG. 84).

Step S911: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether NowIndex<MaxIndex.
“NowIndex” is a value indicating the current Index. "NowIndex" may be updated to a large value in response to button presses.
“NowIndex” may be “NowIndex=MaxIndex” at maximum. However, "NowIndex>MaxIndex" is never satisfied. In other words, no matter how many buttons are pressed, "NowIndex" will never exceed "MaxIndex".
"NowIndex" is the first variable that may be updated according to the operation input of the operating means, and "MaxIndex" is the second variable that may be updated as time passes. be.

Then, when it is confirmed that NowIndex<MaxIndex (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that NowIndex<MaxIndex (No), that is, if "NowIndex=MaxIndex", the production control CPU 126 executes step S916.

The reason why step S912 is not executed when "NowIndex=MaxIndex" is that when "NowIndex=MaxIndex", the stage of production has progressed to the maximum at this point, so the step update lottery in step S912 This is to prevent this from being executed.

Step S912: The performance control CPU 126 executes a process to check whether the step update lottery has been won or whether the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number (for example, 6) or more. The step update lottery can be a lottery based on a predetermined winning probability (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/2 to 1/10, etc.).

As a result, if it is confirmed that the step update lottery has been won or that the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S913. On the other hand, if the step update lottery has been won or if it cannot be confirmed that the deviation between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more (No), the performance control CPU 126 executes step S916.

Step S913: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of incrementing NowIndex (NowIndex+1).

Step S914: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether the contents of the NowIndex scenario are successful. Whether or not the contents of the NowIndex scenario are successful can be confirmed by checking whether the value of NowIndex is "15" or not.

Specifically, the production control CPU 126 determines that the scenario of NowIndex is successful when the value of NowIndex is "15", and when the value of NowIndex is less than "15", the content of the scenario of NowIndex is determined to be successful. It can be determined that the content of the scenario is not successful.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S915. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the contents of the NowIndex scenario are successful (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S916.

Step S915: The production control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, a process is executed to select a performance pattern in which character information of success is displayed on the meter M while performing a trick falling performance.

Step S916: The production control CPU 126 executes processing at the time of input (progress production execution means). Specifically, processing is executed to select a performance pattern that performs a performance at the time of input but not at the time of success. Processing during input includes selecting a production pattern that displays effects corresponding to button presses (images of friendly characters attacking, images of fists at the top of button images, etc.), and outputting sound effects when pressing buttons. Executes processing such as selecting a production pattern to be used.

In addition, when the stage of the performance changes (for example, when changing from SU1 to SU2), a performance pattern of the progress performance that reduces the colored part of the meter value M is selected, and when the stage of the performance does not change, the meter value A performance pattern that maintains the colored part of M is selected.
When the above processing is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the process during button press performance execution (FIG. 80).

[Lever input processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of lever input processing. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S920: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of storing the fixed maximum value of the index of the reference scenario in NowIndex. The fixed maximum value of the index of the reference scenario means the largest value of the index of the reference scenario, regardless of the number of frames that have elapsed since the start of the valid time. That is, the variable maximum value (MaxIndex) changes in value over time, but the fixed maximum value is fixed regardless of the passage of time.

For example, if the referenced scenario is the "Success Scenario", the fixed maximum value of Index of the reference scenario is "15" (see (A) in Figure 84), so "15" is set for "NowIndex". Execute the process to store.
On the other hand, if the referenced scenario is a "failure scenario", the fixed maximum index value of the reference scenario is "14" (see (B) in Figure 84), so "14" is set for "NowIndex". Execute the process to store.

Step S921: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether the contents of the NowIndex scenario are successful. The confirmation method is as described in step S914.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the content of the NowIndex scenario is successful (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S922. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the contents of the NowIndex scenario are successful (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S923.

Step S922: The production control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, a process is executed to select a performance pattern (a performance pattern for a special notification performance at the time of success) in which character information of success is displayed on the meter M while performing a trick falling performance.

Step S923: The production control CPU 126 executes processing in case of failure. Specifically, a performance pattern in which the enemy character repels the attack of an ally character is performed without executing the effect of falling objects, and text information of failure is displayed on the meter M (direction of special notification performance in case of failure). pattern).
Note that the effect pattern selected by the success process or the failure process can continue to be executed until the effective time ends (the same applies hereinafter).
When the above processing is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the process during button press performance execution (FIG. 80).

By executing the processes shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the production control CPU 126 enables the execution of the progress production when the push button 45a is operated, and when the lever member 45b is operated, the production control CPU 126 enables the execution of the progress production. To make it possible to execute a special notification performance for notifying a specific result (progress performance execution means).

[Processing at the end of button press production]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the process at the end of the button press effect. The procedure will be explained below using an example procedure.

Step S930: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether the currently referenced scenario (reference scenario) is a successful scenario.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the reference scenario is a successful scenario (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S931. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the reference scenario is a successful scenario (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S932.

Step S931: The production control CPU 126 executes a process to check whether the process at the time of success has been executed. Whether or not the successful process has been executed can be confirmed by setting the successful process executed flag when the successful process is executed. Note that the successful processing completion flag can be reset at the end of a repeated button press effect, at the end of a variation, or the like.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the successful process has been executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press effect management process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the successful process has been executed (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S933.

Step S932: The production control CPU 126 executes a process of checking whether the process at the time of failure has been executed. Whether or not the failure process has been executed can be confirmed by setting the failure process executed flag when the failure process is executed. Note that the failure process execution completion flag can be reset at the end of the button press effect, at the end of the variation, or the like.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the process at the time of failure has been executed (Yes), the performance control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press performance management process (FIG. 77). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the process at the time of failure has been executed (No), the production control CPU 126 executes step S934.

Step S933: The production control CPU 126 executes the process at the time of success. Specifically, a process is executed to select a performance pattern in which character information of success is displayed on the meter M while performing a trick falling performance.

Step S934: The production control CPU 126 executes processing in case of failure. Specifically, processing is executed to select a performance pattern in which a performance in which the enemy character repels the attack of an ally character is performed, and character information indicating failure is displayed on the meter M, without performing a performance in which a falling object is performed.
When the above processing is completed, the performance control CPU 126 returns to the button continuous press performance management process (FIG. 77).

FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of a success scenario and a failure scenario of a repeated button press effect.
The performance control CPU 126 controls the contents of the button-hitting performance while referring to the selected scenario.
Each scenario is composed of "number of frames,""scenariodetails," and "Index" as information for managing the scenario.

The "number of frames" represents the elapsed time during the valid time. The valid time of the button repeated press effect (button valid time) starts from "number of frames = 0" and ends at "number of frames = 240".

"Scenario details" represents the stage of the button-mashing performance. "SU1" to "SU4" correspond to the 1st to 4th stages of the button-mashing effect, "success" corresponds to the final stage of the button-mashing effect, and "failure" corresponds to the button-mashing effect. It corresponds to the non-final stage of production.

"Index" is an internal variable that manages the scenario. "Index" starts at "0", ends at "15" for a success scenario, and ends at "14" for a failure scenario.

In this way, in the button-mashing performance, the effective time starts from the point when the "number of frames" is "0", regardless of whether a success scenario is selected or a failure scenario is selected. The valid time ends when the "number of frames" reaches "240".

The valid time is the time during which the operation of the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is valid. Therefore, if you operate the push button 45a or the lever member 45b during the valid time of the button press effect (during the valid time), that operation will affect the content of the button press effect, but outside the valid time (the valid time is Even if the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated before the start or after the valid time has ended, the operation will not affect the content of the button press performance.

[(A) Success scenario]
Details of the success scenario are as follows.
The "number of frames" is set every 15 frames from "0" to "240".
“Scenario Details” includes “SU1” to “SU4” and “Success”.
"Index" is set in one step from "0" to "15".

“SU1” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “0, 15” in “Number of Frames” and “0, 1” in “Index”.
“SU2” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “30 to 90” in “Number of Frames” and “2 to 6” in “Index”.
“SU3” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “105 to 150” in “Number of Frames” and “7 to 10” in “Index”.
“SU4” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “165 to 210” in “Number of Frames” and “11 to 14” in “Index”.
“Success” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “225,240” in “Number of Frames” and “15” in “Index”.

For example, in a situation where the success scenario is selected, if the "number of frames" is "15", "MaxIndex" is "1", so in this case, the button press effect can proceed up to "SU1". be.

[(B) Failure scenario]
Details of the failure scenario are as follows.
The "number of frames" is set every 15 frames from "0" to "240". This point is similar to the success scenario.
The “scenario details” include “SU1” to “SU4” and “failure”.
"Index" is set in one step at a time from "0" to "14". However, the last part of "Index" (on the right side in the figure) is "14" → "14", and in the failure scenario, "Index" does not shift to "15".

“SU1” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “0, 15” in “Number of Frames” and “0, 1” in “Index”.
“SU2” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “30 to 90” in “Number of Frames” and “2 to 6” in “Index”.
“SU3” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “105 to 150” in “Number of Frames” and “7 to 10” in “Index”.
“SU4” in “Scenario details” corresponds to “165 to 225” in “Number of frames” and “11 to 14 (two 14s)” in “Index”.
“Failure” in “Scenario Details” corresponds to “240” in “Number of Frames”.

For example, in a situation where a failure scenario is selected, if the "Number of frames" is "165", "MaxIndex" is "11", so in this case, the button press effect can proceed up to "SU4". be.
Note that these scenarios are just examples, and other scenarios may be prepared.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an operational image of a success scenario. When the success scenario is selected, the button press effect is executed as the following effect mode.

[(A) Repeated hits]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a has been continuously pressed since the start of the valid time. Further, it is assumed that a winner is always won in the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed.

When the "number of frames" is "0, 15", the "Index" is "0, 1", so the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 90", the "Index" is "2 to 6", so the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "105 to 150", the "Index" is "7 to 10", and the "scenario details" is "SU3 (third stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "165 to 210", the "Index" is "11 to 14", and the "scenario details" is "SU4 (fourth stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "Index" is "15", and the "scenario details" is "success (final stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and "scenario details" is "success".
This manner of proceeding with the presentation is a first proceeding manner upon success in which the stage of the presentation of the repeated button press presentation is advanced one step at a time to the next stage in accordance with the elapse of the effective time.

[(B) Pressing starts from frame 225]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the valid time, and that the user starts repeatedly pressing the push button 45a when the "number of frames" is "225". Further, it is assumed that the player did not win the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0 to 210", the "Index" is "0 to 14", and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "Index" is "15", and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and "scenario details" is "success (final stage of button press effect)".
The progress of this kind of performance is such that when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more, the stage of the button press performance is successfully advanced to the next stage one step at a time, regardless of the elapse of the effective time. This is the second progress mode.

[(C) Lever input on 30 frame]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the valid time, and the lever member 45b is operated while the "number of frames" is "30".

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0, 15", the "Index" is "0, 1", and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 225", the "Index" is "0 to 15", and the "scenario details" is "success (final stage of button press production)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and "scenario details" is "success".
This manner of proceeding with the presentation is a second proceeding manner when the special notification presentation is successfully executed when the lever member is operated.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an operational image of a failure scenario. When the failure scenario is selected, the button press effect is executed as the following effect mode.

[(A) Repeated hits]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a has been continuously pressed since the start of the valid time. Further, it is assumed that a winner is always won in the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0, 15", the "Index" is "0, 1", and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 90", the "Index" is "2 to 6", and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "105 to 150", the "Index" is "7 to 10", and the "scenario details" is "SU3 (third stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "165 to 225", the "Index" is "11 to 14", and the "scenario details" is "SU4 (fourth stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button press effect)".
This manner of proceeding with the presentation is a first manner of proceeding in the event of failure in which the presentation stage of the button press presentation is advanced one step at a time to the next stage in accordance with the elapse of the effective time.

[(B) Pressing starts from frame 225]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the valid time, and that the user starts repeatedly pressing the push button 45a when the "number of frames" is "225". Further, it is assumed that the player did not win the step update lottery executed when the push button 45a is pressed.

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0 to 210", the "Index" is "0 to 14", and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "225", the "Index" is "14", and the "scenario details" is "SU2 (second stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist, and "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button press effect)".
This kind of performance progresses when the difference between MaxIndex and NowIndex is a certain number or more, and when the button-pressing performance fails to advance to the next stage one stage at a time, regardless of the elapse of the valid time. This is the second progress mode.

[(C) Lever input on 30 frame]
Here, it is assumed that the push button 45a is not pressed from the start of the valid time, and the lever member 45b is operated while the "number of frames" is "30".

In this case, when the "number of frames" is "0, 15", the "Index" is "0, 1", and the "scenario details" is "SU1 (first stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "30 to 225", the "Index" is "0 to 14", and the "scenario details" is "failure (non-final stage of button press effect)".

When the "number of frames" is "240", "Index" does not exist and "scenario details" is "failure".
This manner of proceeding with the performance is a second manner of proceeding when the special notification performance fails to be executed when the lever member is operated.

Then, the performance control CPU 126 controls the performance mode of the button continuous press performance as shown in FIGS. 85 and 86 by monitoring the operation status of various operation means while referring to the above-mentioned success scenario and failure scenario. Can be done.

As explained above, the present embodiment has the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the button Since the progress of the repeated button press effects is different, it is possible to increase the variation of the effects compared to a system where there is only one type of progress of the button press effect, resulting in innovative gameplay. be able to.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the content of the repeated button press effect differs depending on whether the push button 45a or the lever member 45b is operated, so the same effect can be obtained no matter which operating means is operated. Compared to a method in which the game is executed or a method in which only one of the operating means can be operated, variations in performance can be increased, and as a result, novel gameplay can be exhibited.

(3) According to the present embodiment, if the lever member 45b is operated during the execution of the button repetition performance, the final result of the button repetition performance is notified, so the player can quickly check the final result. can do.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the stage of the button-mashing performance can be advanced one step at a time according to the elapse of the effective time, or the stage of the button-mashing performance can be performed regardless of the elapse of the effective time. Since the stage is advanced one step at a time to the next stage, no matter how the effective time has elapsed, it is possible to reliably advance the stage of the button press performance to the next stage one step at a time. As a result, it is possible to enjoy novel gameplay.

(5) In the present embodiment, if the push button 45a is pressed only once, just before the expiration of the valid time of the push button 45a, the effect almost the same as the final result can be seen. One of the challenges is to avoid the situation. Furthermore, if the player wants to know the final result during a button-hitting performance, the player must press the push button 45a many times, and one of the challenges is to avoid such a situation. There is.

[Prerequisites]
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the performance control device (performance control CPU) holds an index (Index, stage of performance content) of the currently referenced scenario that has been drawn in advance, and stores frames from the start of the button press performance. The progress of the scenario is managed by determining the maximum variation value (MaxIndex) of an index that can be referenced numerically.
Further, each time the push button 45a is pressed, whether or not to advance the current index (NowIndex) is determined by lottery, and if the winner is not selected, the current state is maintained (the value of NowIndex is maintained). There is.

When such control processing is adopted, if the lottery that advances the current index (NowIndex) is not won consecutively, the scenario will not proceed even though the push button 45a is pressed correctly. Situations that do not occur will occur. Therefore, if the deviation between the current index (NowIndex) and the maximum fluctuation value (MaxIndex) exceeds a certain number, the index will be updated regardless of the lottery result ( NowIndex is incremented). Furthermore, by operating the lever member 45b, the current index (NowIndex) is forcibly advanced to the fixed maximum value regardless of such processing.

By employing such processing, it is possible to prevent the scenario from not progressing even though the push button 45a is pressed correctly. Further, by pressing the push button 45a only once, just before the effective time of the push button 45a ends, it is possible to prevent the user from seeing an effect that is substantially the same as the final result. Furthermore, a player who does not wish to repeatedly press or press the push button 45a for a long time can quickly check the final result of the button press performance by operating the lever member 45b.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The mode of presentation mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the embodiment described above, the present invention is applied to a so-called 1-type and 2-type mixing machine, but the present invention may also be applied to a so-called 1-type gaming machine (a gaming machine that does not have a specific area).
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine equipped with a probability variation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type that does not set a practical upper limit on the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to an ST type gaming machine (a type that sets a practical upper limit on the number of probability variations).
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that has a variable probability area, and can also be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a variable probability area.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines that do not adopt "simultaneous spinning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to gaming machines that adopt simultaneous spinning. .

In the embodiment described above, an example of a gaming machine including the 7-segment display device 200 has been described, but a gaming machine that does not include the 7-segment display device 200 may be used.
Further, the 7-segment display device 200 may be changed to a drum unit (for example, a device provided with three rows of reels) or a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a setting change device.
Further, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

Although the staged effect has been explained using an example of a button-pressing effect, it may also be a button-long-pressing effect.
Although the stage performance has been described as an example in which it is executed during fluctuation, it may also be executed during a jackpot game or a small win game.
Although the staged presentation has been described as an example in which it is executed during a ready-to-win presentation, it may also be executed in a scene other than during a ready-to-win presentation (for example, during execution of a preview presentation).
Although the staged effect has been explained using an example of a effect in which the meter value decreases, it may also be a effect in which the meter value increases.

The stage performance may be a performance that does not use a meter. In this case, for example, it is possible to perform an effect such as enlarging or reducing a predetermined effect element.
The stage effect may be an effect executed by an auto button function (a function in which the push button is assumed to have been pressed even if the player does not press the push button).

In the above embodiment, the first operating means is the push button 45a and the second operating means is the lever member 45b. However, the first operating means is the lever member 45b and the second operating means is the push button 45a. It may be the button 45a.
The predetermined condition may be a condition that is satisfied when winning a predetermined lottery for the performance, winning a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the progress performance in the second progress mode, etc.

The embodiment described above can be modified as follows.
(1) Once a lever input to the lever member 45b is detected, the button press process may be disabled (not executed) from then on.
(2) The start timing of the valid time for a button input to the push button 45a and the start timing for a valid time for a lever input to the lever member 45b may be made different. In this case, the valid time start timing of the lever input to the lever member 45b may be set to become valid when a predetermined frame (predetermined time) has elapsed from the valid time start timing of the button input to the push button 45a.

(3) When executing a scenario with a short effective operation time (a performance with a short performance time, a performance of about several seconds), the lever input to the lever member 45b may be disabled from the beginning. In other words, it may have a scenario pattern (performance pattern) that does not accept lever input and only accepts button input.
(4) The progress performance execution means satisfies a predetermined condition more when the gaming state is in an advantageous gaming state (high probability state or time shortened state) than when it is in a normal state (low probability state or non-time shortened state). It may be possible to make it more likely to occur. In addition, the progress performance execution means is configured to satisfy a predetermined condition when the gaming state is in an advantageous gaming state (high probability state or time shortening state) than when it is in a normal state (low probability state or non-time shortening state). You may also make it more difficult.

The present invention is applicable not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines.
In this case, the first operating means may be a push button, and the second operating means may be a bet button.

The images listed as other examples of effects are just examples, and can be modified as appropriate. Further, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and it goes without saying that these can be modified as appropriate.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Starting gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 First special symbol display device 35 Second special symbol display device 34a First special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
200 7 segment display device 300 Storage display device

Claims (1)

an operation means capable of accepting operation input;
a staged performance execution means that makes it possible to execute a staged performance in which the stage of the staged stage progresses step by step from the first stage to the final stage using the operating means;
If the predetermined condition is not satisfied from the start to the end of the valid time period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, the stage of the stage performance is advanced according to the first progress mode, and the stage of the stage performance is advanced and the predetermined condition is met. If the above is satisfied, a progress performance execution means is provided that enables execution of a progress performance that advances the stage of the stage performance by a second progression mode different from the first progression mode,
The stage performance is
having as control information a first numerical value that can be updated by operating the operating means during the valid time of the operating means, and a second numerical value that increases as the valid time elapses;
The predetermined conditions are:
In a situation where the second numerical value is a predetermined value, the value of the first numerical value is less than or equal to a predetermined reference value , and the second numerical value and the first numerical value may be changed regardless of the elapse of the valid time. A gaming machine characterized in that the condition is satisfied when the difference between the two is a certain number or more .

Images